Home

SW01 - heidenhain

1. 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch H Y e O a ining 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations The Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation is particularly convenient for simple machining operations or pre positioning of the tool You can write the a short program in HEIDENHAIN conversational programming and execute it immediately You can also call TNC cycles The program is stored in the file MDI In the Positioning with MDI operating mode the additional status displays can also be activated Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Select the Positioning with MDI mode of operation Program the file MDI as you wish T To start program run press the machine START key gt Limitation FK free contour programming programming graphics and program run graphics subprograms program section repeats and path compensation cannot be used The MDI file must not contain a program call PGM CALL Example 1 A hole with a depth of 20 mm is to be drilled into a single workpiece After clamping and aligning the workpiece and setting the datum you can program and execute the drilling operation in a few lines First you pre position the tool in L blocks straight line blocks to the hole center coordinates at a setup clearance of 5 mm above the workpiece surface Then drill the hole with Cycle 1 PECKING
2. Ol 0 Define tool zero tool radius 5 Call tool tool axis Z Spindle speed 2000 rpm Retract tool F MAX rapid traverse Move the tool at F MAX to a position above the hole Spindle on Define DRILLING cycle Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Total hole depth algebraic sign working direction 3 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI il Straight line function L see Straight Line L on page 125 DRILLING cycle see DRILLING Cycle 200 on page 182 Example 2 Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables Use the 3 D touch probe to rotate the coordinate system See Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Operating Modes section Compensating workpiece misalignment in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Write down the rotation angle and cancel the Basic Rotation Select operating mode Positioning with MDI Select the axis of the rotary table enter the rotation angle you wrote down previously and set the feed rate For example L C 2 561 F50 Conclude entry Press the machine START button The rotation of the table corrects the misalignment HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Feed rate for pecking Depth of each infeed before retraction Dwell time after every retraction in seconds Coordinate of the workpiece surface Set up clearance of the tool above the hole Dwell time in seconds a
3. Q204 Q203 Ma SS tli i RQ DA IN aR la AU A Ny NYY AM Z RN x Dv IN Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles il Fundamentals of thread milling Prerequisites Your machine tool should feature internal spindle cooling cooling lubricant at least 30 bar compressed air supply at least 6 bar Thread milling usually leads to distortions of the thread profile To correct this effect you need tool specific compensation values which are given in the tool catalog or are available from the tool manufacturer You program the compensation with the delta value for the tool radius DR in the tool call The Cycles 262 263 264 and 267 can only be used with rightward rotating tools For Cycle 265 you can use rightward and leftward rotating tools The working direction is determined by the following input parameters Algebraic sign Q239 right hand thread left hand thread and milling method 0351 1 climb 1 up cut The table below illustrates the interrelation between the individual input parameters for rightward rotating tools Right handed 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z PA TIP Right handed 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z HEIDENHAIN TNC
4. introduction 7 Manual Operation and Setup Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Programming Fundamentals of File Management Programming Aids Programming Tools Programming Programming Contours Programming Miscellaneous Functions Programming Cycles Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Programming O Parameters Test Run and Program Run MOD Functions Touch Probe Cycles technica Information 1 1 The TNC 320 28 Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational format 28 Compatibility 28 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Operating Panel 29 Visual display unit 29 Screen layout 29 Operating panel 30 1 3 Modes of Operation 31 Manual operation and electronic handwheel 31 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI 31 Programming and editing 31 Test Run 32 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block 32 1 4 Status Displays 39 General status display 93 Additional status displays 34 1 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3 D touch probes 37 HR electronic handwheels 37 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 37 2 1 Switch On Switch Off AO Switch on AO Switch off 41 To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons 42 Incremental jog positioning 43 Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel 44 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and
5. m x D 3 a D Z O z O O o A HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Call the subprogram marked with LBL SP1 Last program block of the main program with M02 Beginning of subprogram SP2 Call the subprogram marked with LBL 2 End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 End of subprogram 2 9 5 Nesting o il Program execution Main program SUBPGMS is executed up to block 17 Subprogram 1 is called and executed up to block 39 Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called Subprogram 1 is executed from block 40 up to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program SUBPGMS N 9 5 Nesting S Main program SUBPGMS is executed from block 18 up to block 35 Return jump to block 1 and end of program Repeating program section repeats Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program REPS is executed up to block 27 2 Program section between block 27 and block 20 is repeated twice 3 Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 4 Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once including the program section repeat between 20 and block 27 5 Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 end of program 3 Beginning of program section repeat 1 Beginning of program section repeat 2 The program section between this block and LBL
6. UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 ing 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool retracts at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance remains there if programmed for the entered dwell time and advances again at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first PLUNGING DEPTH 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 6 The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX d Thread Mill oping an gt Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction lf you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed whether if a positive depth is
7. deca a e es o ar oe e e a a e 0000000000000 00AO 5 Programming Tools Move to beginning of line BEGIN LINE lt m Z Move to end of line r H m Copy highlighted field copy FIELD Insert copied field PASTE FIELD E 5 2 Tool Data Add the entered number of lines tools at the APPEND end of the table N LINES Insert a line with definable tool number ss LINE Delete current line tool DELETE LINE AAA Sort the tools according to the content of a column SORT Show all drills in the tool table DRILL Show all touch probes in the tool table TS Leaving the tool table Call the file manager and select a file of a different type such as a part program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 103 il m 5 2 Tool Data Pocket E For autom The TNC can manage several pocket tables with any Tile names To activate a specific pocket table for program run you must select it In fe table for tool changer The machine tool builder adapts the functional range of Tod eee Pocket table editing Programming the pocket table to the requirements of your machine The TOE machine tool manual provides further information u dtablextool_p tch atic tool changing you need the pocket table TOOL_P TCH OOVNTDUDYUNeE OS y the file management of a Program Run mode of operation status M 2 oa Editing a pocket table in a Program Run operating mode TOO
8. OnNoOuUDWNP 0 000 Z tf mm min Our 100 MS 1 Introduction 11 ra a E 2 E BEGIN END PAGE PAGE MID EDIT TOOL PROGRAM STARTUP PALLET TABLE 1 4 Status Displays MN rr General status display o i E The status display 1 informs you of the current state of the machine proram fun Gull Sequence Proaranming A tool It is displayed automatically in the following modes of operation 220 H Y ONE Program Run Single Block and Program Run Full Sequence except A raed Goce cos laos Esa y a 2 if the screen layout is set to display graphics only and cas one Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI E EE D 8 CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 5 In the Manual mode and Electronic Handwheel mode the status 1e cvet DeF ala xez Sia 4 Pen display appears in the large window Garten a eri IQ Basic rotation 1 2251 gt aa 14 CYCL DEF 221 CARTESIAN PATTERN Information in the status display ACTL Actual or nominal coordinates of the current position NOML el A STATUS Bene STATUS OF srarus OF XIYIZ Machine axes the TNC displays auxiliary axes in eai TRANSE O del vane jai lower case letters The sequence and quantity of displayed axes is determined by the machine tool builder Refer to your machine manual for more information T Tool number T SM The displayed feed rate in inches corresponds to one tenth of the effective value Spindle speed S feed rate F and active M
9. The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH O0 the cycle will not be executed If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same tool use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging t YN amp OQ gt Q M 00 Minimum size of the pocket 3 times the tool radius att Use the machine parameter suppressDepthErr to define Y whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should poe A AN ES output an error message on or not off Q216 Q221 Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis Q217 at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 228 8 Programming Cycles il 212 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a value lower than that defined in Q207 gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling
10. 100 Tool name Tool length Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Tool length oversize Tool radius oversize Tool radius oversize R2 Tool locked Yes ENT No NO ENT Replacement tool Maximum tool age Maximum tool age for TOOL CALL Current tool life 5 Programming Tools TYPE DOC PLC LCUTS ANGLE CUT RTOL LTOL DIRECT TT R OFFS TT L OFFS LBREAK RBREAK LIFTOFF Tool type Press the SELECT TYPE 3rd soft key row the TNC superimposes a window where you can select the type of tool you want Functions are currently only assigned to the DRILL and MILL tool types Comment on tool up to 16 characters Information on this tool that is to be sent to the PLC Tooth length of the tool for Cycle 22 Maximum plunge angle of the tool for reciprocating plunge cut in Cycles 22 and 208 Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection lf the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation Not supported at present Not supported at present Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L
11. 410 24 13 1 Introduction 416 Overview 416 Selecting probe cycles 416 13 2 Calibrating a Touch Trigger Probe 417 Introduction 417 Calibrating the effective length 417 Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment 418 Displaying calibration values 419 13 3 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment 420 Introduction 420 Measuring the basic rotation 420 Displaying a basic rotation 421 To cancel a basic rotation 421 13 4 Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe 422 Introduction 422 To set the datum in any axis see figure at right 422 Corner as datum using points already probed for a basic rotation see figure at right 423 Circle center as datum 424 13 5 Measuring Workpieces with a 3 D Touch Probe 425 Introduction 425 To find the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece 425 Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane 425 To measure workpiece dimensions 426 To find the angle between the angle reference axis and a side of the workpiece 427 13 6 Touch Probe Data Management 428 Introduction 428 13 7 Automatic Workpiece Measurement 430 Overview 430 Reference system for measurement results 430 DATUM PLANE touch probe cycle O 430 DATUM PLANE touch probe cycle 1 432 MEASURING touch probe cycle 3 433 HEIDENHAIN TN
12. Data bank SQL command text with the following elements SELECT keyword Name of the SOL command Names of the table columns to be transferred Separate column names with a comma see examples O parameters must be bound to all columns entered here FROM table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and table name are entered in single quotation marks see examples Optional WHERE selection criteria A selection criterion consists of a column name condition see table and comparator Link selection criteria with logical AND or OR Program the comparator directly or with a Q parameter A Q parameter is introduced with a colon and placed in single quotation marks see example Optional ORDER BY column name ASC to sort in ascending order or ORDER BY column name DESC to sort in descending order If neither ASC nor DESC are programmed then ascending order is used as the default setting The selected rows are placed in the order determined by the indicated column Optional FOR UPDATE keyword The selected rows are locked against write accesses from other processes HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 351 Tables with SOL Commands isina 10 9 Acce 10 9 mn 1 Tables with SOL Commands Equal to Not equal to Less than Less than or equal to Greater than Greater than or equal to Linking multiple conditions Logical AND Logical OR 352
13. HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 C Cycle Calling 179 Defining 177 Groups 178 Cylinder 369 D Data backup 60 Data interface Pin layout 436 Setting 404 Data transfer rate 404 405 Data transfer software 407 Datum setting 47 During program run 342 Without a 3 D touch probe 47 Datum setting manual Circle center as datum 424 Corner as datum 423 In any axis 422 Datum shift With datum tables 283 Within the program 282 Deepened starting point for drilling 194 Define the blank 76 Depart the contour 119 With polar coordinates 120 Dialog 78 Directory 61 65 Copying 66 Creating 65 Deleting 67 Drilling 182 188 192 Deepened starting point 194 Drilling cycles 180 Dwell time 293 E Ellipse 367 Error messages 90 Help with 90 Ethernet Interface Ethernet interface Connecting and disconnecting network drives 73 Connection possibilities 409 Introduction 409 External data transfer ITNC 530 70 F Face milling 273 Feed rate 45 Changing 46 For rotary axes M116 172 Input possibilities 78 File management 61 Calling 63 Copying a file 66 Deleting a file 67 Directories 61 Copying 66 Creating 65 External data transfer 70 File name 59 File protection 69 File type 59 Marking files 68 Overview of functions
14. STANDARD VEN 1 Stop Bit RTS_CTS FEX 12 MOD Functions il Set the data bits dataBits By setting the data bits you define whether a character is transmitted with 7 or 8 data bits Parity check parity The parity bit helps the receiver to detect transmission errors The parity bit can be formed in three different ways No parity NONE There is no error detection Even parity EVEN Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an odd number of set bits Odd parity ODD Here there is an error if the receiver finds that it has received an even number of set bits Setting the stop bits stopBits The start bit and one or two stop bits enable the receiver to synchronize to every transmitted character during serial data transmission Setting the handshake flowControl With a handshake two devices are checking the data transmission A distinction is made between software handshaking and hardware handshaking No dataflow checking NONE Handshaking is not active Hardware handshaking RTS_CTS Transmission stop is active through RTS Software handshaking KON_XOFF Transmission stop is active through DC3 XOFF HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 8 Setting the Data Interfaces o il Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem gt The functions Transfer all files Transfer selected file and Transfer directory are not available in the FE2 and
15. whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should att Use the machine parameter suppressDepthErr to define output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 234 8 Programming Cycles il 214 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a value lower than that defined in Q207 gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur i 3 ul 2 O a 9 ockets Studs and Slots gt Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane gt Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute val
16. 289 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 290 8 8 Special Cycles 293 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 293 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 294 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 295 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 1 Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 298 Labels 298 9 2 Subprograms 299 Operating sequence 299 Programming notes 299 Programming a subprogram 299 Calling a subprogram 299 9 3 Program Section Repeats 300 Label LBL 300 Operating sequence 300 Programming notes 300 Programming a program section repeat 300 Calling a program section repeat 300 9 4 Separate Program as Subprogram 301 Operating sequence 301 Programming notes 301 Calling any program as a subprogram 302 9 5 Nesting 303 Types of nesting 303 Nesting depth 303 Subprogram within a subprogram 303 Repeating program section repeats 304 Repeating a subprogram 305 20 10 1 Principle and Overview 314 Programming notes 315 Calling O parameter functions 319 10 2 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 316 Example NC blocks 316 Example 316 10 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations 317 Function 317 Overview 317 Programming fundamental operations 318 10 4 Trigonometric Functions 319 Definitions 319 Programming trigonometric fu
17. If you are using the SL Cycles in O parameter programs the Cycle Parameters Q1 to 020 cannot be used as program parameters 20 gt Milling depth Q1 incremental value Distance CONTOUR DATA between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket gt Path overlap factor Q2 Q2 x tool radius stepover factor k gt Finishing allowance for side Q3 incremental value Finishing allowance in the working plane Finishing allowance for floor O4 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis gt Workpiece surface coordinate O5 absolute value Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface gt Set up clearance 06 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Clearance height O7 absolute value Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning andretraction Example NC blocks at the end of the cycle gt Inside corner radius O8 Inside corner rounding radius entered value is referenced to the tool midpoint path gt Direction of rotation Clockwise 109 Machining direction for pockets E Clockwise 09 1 up cut milling for pocket and island Counterclockwise 09 1 climb milling for pocket and island 260 8 Programming Cycles il PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 gt When calculating the infeed points the TNC does not account for the delta value DR programmed in a TOOL CA
18. If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see Graphics during FK programming page 144 Straight line with tangential connection If the straight line connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FLT soft key n To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog press the FLT soft key Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys Free programming of circular arcs Circular arc without tangential connection To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for free programming of circular arcs press the FC soft key The TNC displays soft keys with which you can enter direct data on the circular arc or data on the circle center Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered If the entered data describes several solutions the graphic will display the contour element in green see Graphics during FK programming page 144 Circular arc with tangential connection If the circular arc connects tangentially to another contour element initiate the dialog with the FCT soft key Z 146 To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog press the FCT soft k
19. Note The algebraic sign determines the size of the arc oa Direction of rotation DR Note The algebraic sign determines whether the arc is concave or convex Further entries if necessary Miscellaneous function M Feed rate F Full circle For a full circle program two CR blocks in succession The end point of the first semicircle is the starting point of the second The end point of the second semicircle is the starting point of the first HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 129 6 4 Path contours a Coordinates asian Coordinates 6 4 Path Contours C Central angle CCA and arc radius R The starting and end points on the contour can be connected with four arcs of the same radius Smaller arc CCA lt 180 Enter the radius with a positive sign R gt 0 Larger arc CCA gt 180 Enter the radius with a negative sign R lt 0 The direction of rotation determines whether the arc is curving outward convex or curving inward concave Convex Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Concave Direction of rotation DR with radius compensation RL Example NC blocks CS The distance from the starting and end points of the arc diameter cannot be greater than the diameter of the arc 130 6 Programming Programming Contours il Circular Path CT with Tangential Connection The tool moves on an arc that starts tangentially to the previously programmed contou
20. Oriented spindle stop possible 0 no 1 yes Angle of spindle orientation in degrees Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation machine coordinate system Result of measurement of the touch probe cycles O and 1 without touch probe radius and probe length compensation Last reference point of a manual touch probe cycle or last touch point from Cycle O without probe length compensation but with probe radius compensation workpiece coordinate system Oriented spindle stop Read values Tool length L Tool radius R Tool radius R2 Oversize for tool length DL Oversize for tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool locked TL O not locked 1 locked ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add o il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add 20 21 22 23 24 Touch probe cycles 990 1 Execution status 992 10 14 16 Example Assign the value of the active scaling factor for the Z axis to 025 338 Number of replacement tool RT Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance for le
21. Outside circle Position the touch probe at the starting position for the first touch point outside of the circle Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Repeat the probing process for the remaining three points See figure at lower right Datum Enter the coordinates of the datum and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key To terminate the probe function press the END key After the probing procedure is completed the TNC displays the coordinates of the circle center and the circle radius PR 424 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il 13 5 Measuring Workpieces with a 3 D Touch Probe Introduction You can also use the touch probe in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel operating modes to make simple measurements on the workpiece Numerous programmable probing cycles are available for more complex measuring tasks see Automatic Workpiece Measurement on page 430 With a 3 D touch probe you can determine position coordinates and from them dimensions and angles on the workpiece To find the coordinate of a position on an aligned workpiece PROBING Select the probing function by pressing the PROBING oe POS soft key Move the touch probe to a starting position near the touch point Select the probe direction and axis of the coordinate Use the corresponding soft keys for selection To probe
22. R Cutter radius HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ockets Studs and Slots 8 3 Cycles for Milli o il 2 POCKET FINISHING Cycle 212 1 The TNC M automatically moves the tool in the tool axis to the set Y up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance Y 3 and subsequently to the center of the pocket 2 From the pocket center the tool moves in the working plane to the Starting point for machining The TNC takes the allowance and tool Y radius into account for calculating the starting point If necessary D the TNC penetrates at the pocket center 2 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse YN FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 24 4 Thetoolthen moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part Dy and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 The tool then departs the contour on a tangential path and returns 5 to the starting point in the working plane X 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the pocket end position starting position iE Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane
23. SENm kl Us MM ES Ed Ed Ed EJ La RS TOUCH CYCL CYCL LBL DEF LBL PROBE CALL CALL TOOL TOOL PGM STOP DEF CALL CALL TNC Model Software and Features This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers TNC 320 340 551 xx The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may not be among the features provided by your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Probing function for the 3 D touch probe Rigid tapping Returning to the contour after an interruption In addition the TNC 320 also has software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder 1st additional axis for 4 axes and open loop spindle 2nd additional axis for 5 axes and open loop spindle Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users Location of use The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Contents HEIDENHAIN TNC 320
24. The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking 2 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth minus the set up clearance and then at the feed rate for countersinking to the countersinking depth If a safety clearance to the side has been entered the TNC immediately positions the tool at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth Then depending on the available space the TNC makes a tangential approach to the core diameter either tangentially from the center or with a pre positioning move to the side and follows a circular path Countersinking at front 5 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the sinking depth at front 6 The INC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 7 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 8 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined trom the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut 9 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 10 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially
25. Touch Probe Cycles Components Program memory Input resolution and display step Input range Interpolation Block processing time 3 D straight line without radius compensation Axis control Traverse range Spindle speed Error compensation Data interfaces Ambient temperature 440 Calibrating a touch probe Compensation of workpiece misalignment manual or automatic Datum setting manual or automatic Automatic workpiece measurement Cycles for automatic tool measurement Main computer with TNC keyboard and integrated 15 1 inch TFT color flat panel display with soft keys 10 MB on compact flash memory card CFR To 0 1 um for linear axes To 0 0001 for angular axes Maximum 999 999 999 mm or 999 999 999 Line in 4 axes Arc in 2 axes Helix combination of circular and linear motion 6 ms 3 D straight line without radius compensation Position loop resolution Signal period of the position encoder 1024 Cycle time of position controller 3 ms Cycle time of speed controller 600 us Maximum 100 m Maximum 100 000 rom analog speed command signal Linear and nonlinear axis error backlash reversal spikes during circular movements thermal expansion Stick slip friction One each RS 232 C V 24 max 115 kilobaud Expanded data interface with LSV 2 protocol for remote operation of the TNC through the data interface with the HEIDENHAIN software TNCremo Ethernet interface 100 Base T approx 2 to 5 megab
26. e O O A A 1 1 eb eb es gt 8 5 SL Cycles N c A ad O D UJ Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined including the overlapping area The surfaces A and B must be pockets The first pocket in Cycle 14 must start outside the second pocket Surface A Area of exclusion Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B Surface A must be a pocket and B an island E A must start outside of B E B must start inside of A Surface A N ad O D UJ N 58 8 Programming Cycles il Area of intersection Only the area where A and B overlap is to be machined The areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined A and B must be pockets E A must start inside of B Surface A Mm a Q O O sl HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 5 SL Cycles k il CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are entered in Cycle 20 y tE Before programming note the following Cycle 20 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program 8 5 SL Cycles The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the TNC performs the cycle at the depth 0 The machining data entered in Cycle 20 are valid for Cycles 21 to 24
27. z 8 2 Cycles for Drilling rn and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Mino and Thread Milling REAMING Cycle 201 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed rate F If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time 4 The tool then retracts to the set up clearance at the feed rate F 184 and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Q203 8 Programming Cycles il Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool during reaming in mm min Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter 0208 0 the tool retracts at the reaming feed rate gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece cl
28. 101 000 Z 5 000 To move the axes in the sequence that the TNC suggests on the screen press the machine START button Noni y A o n e To move the axes in any sequence press the soft keys RESTORE X l ALL a RESTORE Z etc and activate each axis with the machine START sae key To resume machining press the machine START key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 391 il 11 6 Automatic Program Start 11 6 Automatic Program Start Function Y The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of the automatic program start function Refer to your machine manual alt CAUTION danger to life The autostart function must not be used on machines that do not have an enclosed working space Ina Program Run operating mode you can use the AUTOSTART soft key see figure at upper right to define a specific time at which the program that is currently active in this operating mode is to be started Show the window for entering the starting time see a figure at center right Time h min sec Time of day at which the program is to be started Date DD MM YYYY Date at which the program is to be started To activate the start select OK 392 Program 3241 8 run full sequence Programming BEGIN PGM 321 MM BLK FORM 1 BLK FORM 2 TOOL CALL 32 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 30 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Z 52222 CYCL DEF 14 0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY 1 2 3 4 L 2 10 RO FMAX M3 5 6 ri CYCL DEF 14 5 CYCL DEF 20 Q1 10 5 Q2 1
29. 320 7 5 Miscellaneous UN for Rotary Axes o il 7 5 Miscellaneous Mons for Rotary Axes Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 Standard behavior The TNC moves the tool from the current angular value to the programmed angular value Example Current angular value 538 Programmed angular value 180 Actual distance of traverse 358 Behavior with M94 At the start of block the TNC first reduces the current angular value to a value less than 360 and then moves the tool to the programmed value If several rotary axes are active M94 will reduce the display of all rotary axes As an alternative you can enter a rotary axis after M94 The TNC then reduces the display only of this axis Example NC blocks To reduce display of all active rotary axes To reduce display of the C axis only To reduce display of all active rotary axes and then move the tool in the C axis to the programmed value Effect M94 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M94 becomes effective at the start of block 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il E Working with Cycles 8 1 Working with Cycles Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several working steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles Coordinate transformations and other special cycles are also provided as standard cycles for an overview see page 178 Fixed cycles with numbers 200 and
30. 4 3T Q3 0 7A Q4 0 7A Q5 0 Q6 2 Q7 50 CONTAND_ I Apel 4 Automatic program start M Current date Current time el Start program 7 Date DD MM YY 7 Time CHRS MIN SEC Start enabled Autostart active He E if c Z 2 I Je a o 7 TEST 321 H a i da CANCEL mm min Our 100 11 Test Run and Program Run 11 7 Optional Block Skip Function In a test run or program run the TNC can skip over blocks that begin with a slash EH To run or test the program without the blocks E preceded by a slash set the soft key to ON To run or test the program with the blocks preceded by a slash set the soft key to OFF gt This function does not work for TOOL DEF blocks After a power interruption the control returns to the most recently selected setting Inserting the character Inthe Programming and Editing mode you select the block in which the character is to be inserted A Press the SHOW BLOCK soft key BLOCK Erasing the character Inthe Programming and Editing mode you select the block in which the character is to be erased a Press the HIDE BLOCK soft key BLOCK HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 11 7 Optional Block Skip o il sb otional Program Run Interruption 11 8 Optional Program Run Interruption Function The TNC optionally interrupts the program run or test run at blocks containing M01 If you use M01 in the Program
31. Cycle 265 215 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 219 8 3 Cycles for Milling Pockets Studs and Slots 225 Overview 220 POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 226 POCKET FINISHING Cycle 212 228 STUD FINISHING Cycle 213 230 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 5 232 CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Cycle 214 234 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING Cycle 215 236 SLOT oblong hole with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 210 238 CIRCULAR SLOT oblong hole with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 211 241 8 4 Cycles for Machining Point Patterns 247 Overview 247 CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 248 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 250 18 8 5 SL Cycles 254 Fundamentals 254 Overview of SL Cycles 256 CONTOUR Cycle 14 256 Overlapping contours 257 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 260 PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 261 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 262 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 263 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 264 8 6 Cycles for Multipass Milling 268 Overview 268 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 268 RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 270 FACE MILLING Cycle 232 273 8 7 Coordinate Transtormation Cycles 281 Overview 281 Effect of coordinate transformations 281 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 282 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 283 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 286 ROTATION Cycle 10 288 SCALING FACTOR Cycle 11
32. DR2 Tool inhibited 0 or 1 Number of replacement tool Maximum tool age TIME1 Maximum tool age TIME2 Current tool age CUR TIME 10 Programming O Parameters il Pocket table data 51 Pocket number of a tool in the tool pocket table 52 Immediately after IOOL CALL programmed values 60 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Pocket number Tool no Tool no PLC status Maximum tooth length LCUTS Maximum plunge angle ANGLE TT Number of teeth CUT TT Wear tolerance for length LTOL TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL TT Rotational direction DIRECT O positive 1 negative TT Offset for radius R OFFS TT Offset for length L OFFS TT Breakage tolerance in length LBREAK TT Breakage tolerance in radius RBREAK PLC value Center misalignment in reference axis CAL OF1 Center misalignment in minor axis CAL OF2 Spindle angle for calibration CAL ANG Tool type for pocket table Maximum rom NMAX Tool number Special tool O no 1 yes Fixed pocket O no 1 yes Locked pocket O no 1 yes PLC status Pocket number Tool magazine number Tool number T Active tool axis O X6 U ESA La LO W Spindle speed S Functions Imi
33. FEX operating modes PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer LSV2 software TNCremoNT Non HEIDENHAIN devices such as FEX punchers PC without TNCremoNT HEIDENHAIN floppy disk units FE m 12 8 Setting the Data Interfaces 406 12 MOD Functions il Software for data transfer For transfer of files to and from the TNC we recommend using the HEIDENHAIN TNCremoNT data transfer software With TNCremoNT data transfer is possible with all HEIDENHAIN controls via the serial interface or the Ethernet interface You can download the current version of TNCremoNT free of charge from the HEIDENHAIN Filebase www heidenhain de lt service gt lt download area gt lt TNCremo NT gt System requirements for TNCremoNT PC with 486 processor or higher Operating system Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 16 MB RAM 5 MB free memory space on your hard disk An available serial interface or connection to the TCP IP network Installation under Windows Start the SETUP EXE installation program with the File Manager Explorer Follow the setup program instructions Starting TNCremoNT under Windows Click lt Start gt lt Programs gt lt HEIDENHAIN Applications gt lt TNCremoNT gt When you start TNCremoNT for the first time TNCremoNT automatically tries to set up a connection with the TNC HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 8 Setting the Data Interfaces o il 12 8 Setting the Data Interfaces Data transfer
34. If you are in a test run interrupt it To call O parameter functions Press the Q INFO soft ES key in the Programming and Editing mode of operation The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Q parameters or string parameters In the Program Run Single Block Program Run Full Sequence and Test Run modes of operation select the screen layout Program Status g and Changing O Parameters Poel Select the Program Q PARAM soft key Q PARAM Select the Q PARAMETER LIST soft key The TNC opens a pop up window in which you can enter the desired range for display of the Q parameters or string parameters MERA With the Q PARAMETER REQUEST soft key available REQUEST only in Manual Operation Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block you can request individual Q parameters To assign a new value overwrite the displayed value and confirm with the OK Q PARAMETER LIST Y E O e o q 324 programs in all operating modes and except in the test run edit them Manual operation P T O g r a m m i n g 113 0 o BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 1 Z X Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z 52000 L Z 10 R FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 PECKING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UPZ CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 1p CYCL DEF 4 3 PLAGNGIAM LCR ONOVOUBWNP z 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 From Q 40 To Q 52 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR 13 L Z 2 RO FMAX M
35. Input range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Definition of whether the TNC should retract the tool in the direction of the positive tool axis at an NC stop in order to avoid leaving dwell marks on the contour If Y is defined the TNC retracts the tool from the contour by 0 1 mm provided that this function was activated in the NC program with M148 see Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 on page 171 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Tool type Tool description PLC status Tooth length in the tool axis Maximum plunge angle Number of teeth Wear tolerance radius Wear tolerance length Cutting direction M3 Tool offset radius Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length Breakage tolerance radius Retract tool Y N E 5 2 Tool Data j il m 5 2 Tool Data Editing tool tables The tool table that is active during execution of the part program is designated TOOL T and must be saved in the table directory The tool table TOOL T can be edited only in a machine mode of operation for archiving or test runs give the tool tables some other name with the extension T By default for the Test Run and Programming modes the TNC uses the simtool t tool table which is also stored in the table directory In the Program
36. MILLING cycle Call CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle Tool change Call slotting mill Cycle definition for slot 1 8 3 Cycles for Milling Pockets Studs and Slots o il 8 3 Cycles for mm ockets Studs and Slots 2 46 Call cycle for slot 1 New starting angle for slot 2 Call cycle for slot 2 Retract in the tool axis end program 8 Programming Cycles il 8 4 Cycles for Machining Point Patterns Overview The TNC provides two cycles for machining point patterns directly 220 CIRCULAR PATTERN 220 lt 1 221 LINEAR PATTERN 221 You can combine Cycle 220 and Cycle 221 with the following fixed cycles Cycle 200 Cycle 201 Cycle 202 Cycle 203 Cycle 204 Cycle 205 Cycle 206 Cycle 207 Cycle 208 Cycle 209 Cycle 212 Cycle 213 Cycle 214 Cycle 215 Cycle 262 Cycle 263 Cycle 264 Cycle 265 Cycle 267 DRILLING REAMING BORING UNIVERSAL DRILLING BACK BORING UNIVERSAL PECKING TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder RIGID TAPPING NEW without a floating tap holder BORE MILLING TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING POCKET FINISHING STUD FINISHING CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING THREAD MILLING THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING THREAD DRILLING MILLING HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Point Patterns Ining ach jam YN amp OQ gt O Y 00 o il CIRCULAR PATTERN Cycle 220 Sams 1 Atrapid traverse the TNC moves the tool f
37. Miscellaneous Functions M 45 Function 45 Entering values 45 Changing the spindle speed and feed rate 46 Preparation 47 Datum setting with axis keys 47 10 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Machining Operations 50 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI 50 Protecting and erasing programs in MD I 52 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 11 il 4 1 Fundamentals 54 Position encoders and reference marks 54 Reference system 54 Reference system on milling machines 55 Polar coordinates 56 Screen keypad 60 Data backup 60 4 3 Working with the File Manager 61 Directories 61 Paths 61 Overview Functions of the file manager 62 Calling the file manager 63 Selecting drives directories and files 64 Creating a new directory 65 Copying a single file 66 Copying a directory 66 Choosing one of the last 10 files selected 67 Deleting a file 67 Deleting a directory 67 Marking files 68 Renaming a file 69 File sorting 69 Additional functions 69 Data transter to or from an external data medium 70 Copying files into another directory 12 The TNC in a network 73 USB devices on the TNC 74 4 4 Creating and Writing Programs 75 Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN conversational format 75 Defining the blank form BLK FORM 75 Creat
38. O O O de 00 286 8 Programming Cycles il ae Mirrored axis Enter the axis to be mirrored You co can mirror all axes including rotary axes except for the spindle axis and Its auxiliary axes You can enter up to three axes Reset Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example NC blocks 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles ROTATION Cycle 10 The TNC can rotate the coordinate system about the active datum in the working plane within a program Effect The ROTATION cycle becomes effective as soon as It is defined in the program lt is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active rotation angle is shown in the additional status display Reference axis for the rotation angle E X Y plane X axis E Y Z plane Y axis E Z X plane Z axis e Transformation Cycles CS Before programming note the following An active radius compensation is canceled by defining Cycle 10 and must therefore be reprogrammed if necessary After defining Cycle 10 you must move both axes of the working plane to activate rotation for all axes 10 Rotation Enter the rotation angle in degrees Input gt range 360 to 360 absolute or incremental O O O de 00 Cancellation Program the ROTATION cycle once again with a rotation angle of O 60 Example NC blocks 288 8 Programming
39. Q5 SELECT an SOMEENCHION HANDLE Q9 Q5 Handle for selected data File SQL server management 1234 NC program 347 Tables with SQL Commands isina 10 9 Acce 10 9 accio Tables with SOL Commands Programming SOL commands Program SOL commands in the Programming and Editing mode SQL Call the SQL functions by pressing the SQL soft key Select an SOL command via soft key See overview or press the SQL EXECUTE soft key and program the SOL command Overview of the soft keys SQL EXECUTE Program a Select command SQL BIND Bind a Q parameter to a table column SOL FETCH Read table rows from the result set and save them In O parameters SOL UPDATE Save data from the O parameters in an existing table row in the result set SOL INSERT Save data from the O parameters in a new table row in the result set SOL COMMIT Transfer table rows from the result set into the table and conclude the transaction SOL ROLLBACK If INDEX is not programmed Discard any changes insertions and conclude the transaction If INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains in the result set All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded 348 SQL EXECUTE SQL BIND SQL FETCH SQL UPDATE SQL INSERT SQL COMMIT SAL ROLLBACK 10 Programming Q Parameters il SOL BIND SQL BIND binds a O parameter to a table column The SOL commands Fetch U
40. Run mode the TNC does not switch off the spindle or coolant Do not interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks containing M01 Set soft key to OFF Interrupt Program Run or Test Run at blocks p orr containing M01 Set soft key to ON 394 11 Test Run and Program Run il MOD Functions 12 1 MOD Functions Programming The MOD functions provide additional input possibilities and displays The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode Selecting the MOD functions Code number Call the operating mode in which you wish to change the MOD NS functions NC software C TNC320_332 NC kernel C_NCKERN_307 noo To select the MOD functions press the MOD key cancel 12 1 MOD Functions Changing the settings Select the desired MOD function in the displayed menu with the oj ele arrow keys There are three possibilities for changing a setting depending on the function selected Enter only the number Change the setting by pressing the ENT key Change a setting via a selection window If more than one possibility is available for a particular setting you can superimpose a window listing all of the given possibilities by pressing the GOTO key Select the desired setting directly by pressing the arrow keys and then confirming with ENT If you don t want to change the setting close the window again with END Exiting the MOD functions Close the MOD functions with
41. STOP CES The minimum and maximum spindle speeds entered as machine parameters are not fallen short of or exceeded respectively If the MP minSpindleOverride 0 then the setting spindle override 0 leads to a spindle stop 46 2 Manual Operation and Setup il 2 4 Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Probe Note iE For datum setting with a 3 D touch probe refer to the Touch Probe Cycles Manual You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known position on the workpiece Preparation Clamp and align the workpiece Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindle Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual position values Datum setting with axis keys alt Fragile workpiece If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than the desired datum by the value d g Select the Manual Operation mode x Y Move the tool slowly until it touches scratches the workpiece surface Select the axis Dd Zero tool in spindle axis Set the display to a known ENT 4 o workpiece position here 0 or enter the thickness d of the shim In the tool axis offset the tool radius Repeat the process for the remaining axes If you are using a preset tool set the display of the tool axis to the length L of the tool or enter the sum Z L d HEIDENHAIN TNC 320
42. Straight Lines 126 Corner Rounding RND 127 Circle center CC 128 Circular path C around circle center CC 129 Circular path CR with defined radius 129 Circular Path CT with Tangential Connection 131 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates 136 Overview 136 Polar coordinate origin Pole CC 136 Straight line LP 137 Circular path CP around pole CC 137 Circular Path CTP with Tangential Connection 138 Helical interpolation 138 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 15 il 16 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming 143 Fundamentals 143 Graphics during FK programming 144 Initiating the FK dialog 145 Free programming of straight lines 146 Free programming of circular arcs 146 Input possibilities 147 Auxiliary points 150 Relative data 151 7 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP 160 Fundamentals 160 7 2 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle and Coolant 162 Overview 162 7 3 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 163 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 163 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior 165 Machining small contour steps M97 165 Machining open contours M98 167 Feed rate for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 167 Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 168 Su
43. TCP IP Properties E 3 xi CES Prerequisite Siang The network card must already be installed on the PC and You can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports rea dy for operation this capability Othenvice you need to ask your network administrator For the appropriate IF settings If the PC that you want to connect the TNC to is already integrated in your company network then keep the PC s Obtain an IP address automatically network address and adapt the TNC s network address Use the following IP address accordingly IP address 160 1 180 1 subnet mask 259 200 U To open Network Connections click lt Start gt lt Control Panel gt lt Network and Dial up Connections gt and then Network Default gateway SS Connections Right click the lt LAN connection gt symbol and then lt Properties gt in the menu that appears Double click lt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt to change the IP settings see figure at top right If it is not yet active select the lt Use the following IP address gt option Advanced In the lt IP address gt input field enter the same IP address that you entered for the PC network settings on the TNC e g 160 1 180 1 Enter 255 255 0 0 in the lt Subnet mask gt input field Confirm the settings with lt OK gt Save the network configuration with lt OK gt You may have to restart Windows now O Obtain ONS server address automatically f Use t
44. The NC stop signal in the status display blinks see table If you do not wish to continue the machining process you can reset the TNC with the INTERNAL STOP soft key The NC stop signal in the status display goes out In this case the program must be restarted from the program beginning gt Program run stopped al Moving the machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during an interruption in the same way as in the Manual Operation mode Application example Retracting the spindle after tool breakage Interrupt machining Enable the external direction keys Press the MANUAL OPERATION soft key Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons Y On some machines you may have to press the machine START button after the MANUAL OPERATION soft key to enable the axis direction buttons Refer to your machine manual 388 11 Test Run and Program Run il Resuming program run after an interruption s If a program run is interrupted during a fixed cycle the program must be resumed from the beginning of the cycle This means that some machining operations will be repeated If you interrupt a program run during execution of a subprogram or program section repeat use the RESTORE POS AT function to return to the position at which the program run was interrupted When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last defined tool Active coordinate transformations e g
45. The TNC can display the graphics only if the shortest side is at least 50 um long and the longest side is no longer War SS SOS S S ni HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 4 Creating and Wri T Programs Programming tool movements in conversational format To program a block initiate the dialog by pressing a function key In the screen headline the TNC then asks you for all the information necessary to program the desired function Example of a dialog Dialog initiation x 10 Enter the target coordinate for the X axis Enter the target coordinate for the Y axis and go to the next question with ENT 20 ENT Enter No radius compensation and go to the next question with ENT Enter a feed rate of 100 mm min for this path contour go to the next question with ENT pa 00 Enter the miscellaneous function M3 spindle ON pressing the ENT key terminates this dialog w The program block window displays the following line Rapid traverse TOOL CALL aos Move at the programmed feed rate unit of measure IS mm min Traverse feed rate automatically calculated in BEGIN PGM 1 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z S3000 L Z 100 RO FMAX L_X 20 38 R FMAX END PGM 1 MM nae ni wie ene mae ne 78 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Ignore the dialog question jno End the dialog immediately Abort th
46. Z X 135 Y 40 Z 5 BLK FORM 0 2 X 30 Y 40 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z 53000 F2222 L X 30 Y 0 FMAX L Z 2 RO FMAX M13 L 2 5 F200 L X 15 5 Y 0 RL 5 CCX 0 CCY 0 0 D35 20 FCT X 15 5 Y 0 DR R15 5 CCX 0 CCY 09 21 L X 30 Y 0 RO 22 L Z 2 23 L Z 10 R FMAX M30 0 87 9 D z O 4 6 Addi 4 7 Integrated PM Calculator 4 7 Integrated Pocket Calculator Operation The TNC features an integrated pocket calculator with the basic mathematical functions Use the CALC key to show and hide the on line pocket calculator Use soft keys to enter the calculator functions Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Parenthetic calculations Arc cosine sine Cosine Tangent Powers of values Square root Inversion p 3 14159265359 Add value to buffer memory Save the value to buffer memory Recall from buffer memory Delete buffer memory contents Natural logarithm Logarithm Exponential function Check algebraic sign Form the absolute value Truncate decimal places 88 ARC SIN COS TAN XAY SORT 1 x PI MS MR MC LN LOG e x SGN ABS INT 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Program run P full sequence rogramming X11 H 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 30 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z 53000 4 L X 30 Y 0 FMAX 5 6 Z 2 RO FMAX M13 Z 5 F200 X 15 5 a 8 FC DR R15 ox a 9 FLT PDX 78 PDvs D3 10 FSELECT1 11 FCT DR R6 3 12 FCT DR R67 CCX 0 13 F
47. above use Q parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the same number For example Q200 is always assigned the set up clearance Q202 the plunging depth etc Fixed cycles sometimes execute extensive operations uy For safety reasons you should run a graphical program test before machining see Test Run on page 382 Machine specific cycles In addition to the HEIDENHAIN cycles many machine tool builders offer their own cycles in the TNC These cycles are available in a separate cycle number range Cycles 300 to 399 Machine specific cycles that are to be defined through the CYCLE DEF key Cycles 500 to 599 Machine specific cycles that are to be defined through the TOUCH PROBE key i Refer to your machine manual for a description of the TT specific function Sometimes machine specific cycles also use transfer parameters which HEIDENHAIN already used in the standard cycles The TNC executes DEF active cycles as soon as they are defined See also Calling cycles on page 179 lt executes CALL active cycles only after they have been called See also Calling cycles on page 179 When DEF active cycles and CALL active cycles are used simultaneously It is important to prevent overwriting of transfer parameters already in use Use the following procedure As a rule always program DEF active cycles before CALL active cycles If yo
48. appears while the TNC is generating the interactive graphics HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Graphics FLT PDX 78 PDY 0 D35 10 FSEL 11 FCT 12 FCT 13 FCT 14 FCT 15 FCT 6 FCT 7 FSEL 8 FLT 19 FCT CCY 0 20L X 21L 2 22 L 2 3L xX ECT1 DR R6 3 DR R67 CCX CCY 0 DR R11 CCX 78 CCY 0 DR R89 CCX CCY 0 DR R6 3 DR R35 CCX 78 CCY 0 ECT1 X 15 5 Y 0 DR R15 5 CCX 0 30 Y 0 RO 2 100 RO FMAX M30 0 4 5 Interactive Program Block number display ON OFF D Shift the soft key row see figure at upper right r To show block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW To omit block numbers Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to OMIT Erasing the graphic gt Shift the soft key row see figure at upper right Delete graphic Press CLEAR GRAPHIC soft key Magnifying or reducing a detail You can select the graphics display by selecting a detail with the frame overlay You can now magnify or reduce the selected detail 5 F20 Select the soft key row for detail magnification reduction second S Fo DR R15 5 cxa sao row see figure at center right r The following functions are available 5 FCT DR Ra aw 4 5 Interactive Programe Graphics Z 2 22 L Z 100 R FMAX M30 Show and move the frame overlay Press and e 23 L xr hold the desired soft key to move the frame 2B co xao Ys 27 C X 6 25 DR overlay 28 L TX 6 25 RO 29 L Z 10 h 30 L
49. as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following soft keys for displaying a part program in pages Go back in the program by one screen Go forward in the program by one screen PaE Go to beginning of program BEGIN Go to end of program M mo E 384 11 Test Run and Program Run il 11 4 Test Run Function In the Test Run mode of operation you can simulate programs and program sections to prevent errors from occurring during program run The TNC checks the programs for the following Geometrical incompatibilities Missing data Impossible jumps Violation of the machine s working space The following functions are also available Blockwise test run Optional block skip Functions for graphic simulation Measuring the machining time Additional status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 11 4 Test Run j il 11 4 Test Run Running a program test If the central tool file is active a tool table must be active status S to run a program test Select a tool table via the file manager PGM MGT in the Test Run mode of operation Select the Test Run operating mode Call the file manager with the PGM MGT key and select the file you wish to test or Go to the program beginning Select line 0 with the GOTO key and confirm your entry with the ENT key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Reset the blank form and test the entire program Test the entire program Test e
50. axis on the workpiece center 378 11 Test Run and Program Run il 3 D view The workpiece is displayed in three dimensions and can be rotated about the vertical axis You can rotate the 3 D display about the vertical and horizontal axes The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame overlay at the beginning of the graphic simulation 11 1 Graphics In the Test Run mode of operation you can isolate details for magnification see Magnifying details page 380 3 gt Press the soft key for 3 D view METE Rotating the 3 D view Shift the soft key row until the soft key for the rotation functions appears Select the functions for rotation HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 379 il 11 1 Graphics Magnifying details You can magnify details in the Test Run and a program run operating modes and in the projection in 3 planes and the 3 D display modes The graphic simulation or the program run respectively must first have been stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all display modes Changing the detail magnification The soft keys are listed in the table Interrupt the graphic simulation if necessary Shift the soft key row in the Test Run mode or in a program run mode respectively until the soft key for detail enlargement appears T Se
51. cuts Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Call machining operation Reset allowance 369 10 13 Programming Examples 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 370 CALL LBL 10 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 LBL 10 Q16 Q6 Q10 Q108 FN 0 Q20 1 FN 0 024 04 Q25 05 04 013 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 X Q1 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 02 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z Q3 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT Q8 L X 0 Y 0 RO FMAX L Z 5 RO F1000 M3 LBL 1 CC Z 0 X 0 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 L Y Q7 RO FQ12 FN 1 020 020 1 FN 1 024 024 025 FN 11 IF 020 GT Q13 GOTO LBL 99 LP PR Q16 PA Q24 FQ11 L Y 0 RO FQ12 FN 1 Q20 020 1 FN 1 024 024 025 FN 12 IF Q20 LT 013 GOTO LBL 1 LBL 99 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT 0 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT CYCL DEF 7 1 X 0 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 0 CYCL DEF 7 3 Z 0 LBL 0 END PGM CYLIN Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Account for allowance and tool based on the cylinder radius Set counter Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Calculate angle increment Shift datum to center of cylinder X axis Account for rotational position in the plane Pre position in the plane to the cylinder center Pre position in the tool axis Se
52. directly after switch on Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced to a predetermined point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system is based on the three coordinate axes X Y and Z The axes are mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum A coordinate identifies the distance from the datum in one of these directions A position in a plane is thus described through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other Z known position reference point you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental coordinate values Y X 54 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids Reference system on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The right hand rule is illustrated for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb points in the
53. executes the part program up to the block in which a Q subprogram is called with CALL LBL O BEGIN PGM o 2 The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end The i Q subprogram end is marked LBL O P 3 The TNC then resumes the part program from the block after the CALL LBL1 subprogram call N G O Programming notes L Z 100 M2 A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms You can call subprograms in any sequence and as often as desired A subprogram cannot call itself Write subprograms at the end of the main program behind the block with M02 or M30 END PGM If subprograms are located before the block with M02 or M30 they will be executed at least once even if they are not called Programming a subprogram To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key SET Enter the subprogram number To mark the end press the LBL SET key and enter the label number 0 Calling a subprogram To call a subprogram press the LBL CALL key CALL Label number Enter the label number of the subprogram you wish to call If you want to use a label name press the key to switch to text entry Repeat REP Ignore the dialog question with the NO ENT key Repeat REP is used only for program section repeats CALL LBL 0 is not permitted Label 0 is only used to mark the end of a subprogram HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 299 il a Program Section Repeats 9 3 Program Section Repeats Label LBL The beg
54. file protection PROTEC UNPROTECT Manage network drives Copy a directory COPY DIR Display all the directories of a particular drive E Delete directory with all its subdirectories Sort files by properties SORT Create new file NEU FILE Select the editor SELECT EDITOR 62 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Calling the file manager management window Figure at upper right shows the factory default setting If the TNC displays a different screen layout press the WINDOW soft key Press the PGM MGT key the TNC displays the file MGT The narrow window on the left 1 shows the available drives and directories Drives designate devices with which data are stored or transferred One drive is the internal memory of the TNC Other drives are the RS232 RS422 Ethernet and USB interfaces which you can used for example to connect a personal computer or other storage device A directory is always identified by a folder symbol to the left and the directory name to the right The control displays a subdirectory to the right of and below Its parent directory A box with the symbol in front of the folder symbol indicates that there are further subdirectories which can be shown with the key or ENT The wide window on the right 2 shows you all files that are stored in the selected directory Each file is shown with additional information illustrated in the table below F
55. file you wish to rename RENAME Select the renaming function nc v2 Enter the new file name the file type cannot be changed To rename Press the OK soft key or the ENT key File sorting Select the folder in which you wish to sort the files Select the SORT soft key Select the soft key with the corresponding display criterion SORT Additional functions Protecting a file Canceling file protection Move the highlight to the file you want to protect To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS soft key PROTECT To enable file protection press the PROTECT soft D key The file is distinguished by a symbol To cancel file protection proceed in the same way using the UNPROTECT soft key Select the editor Move the highlight in the right window onto the file you want to open ae To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Se To select the editor with which to open the selected EDITOR file press the SELECT EDITOR soft key Mark the desired editor Press the OK soft key to open the file Activate or deactivate USB devices E To select the additional functions press the MORE FUNCTIONS soft key Shift the soft key row Select the soft key for activating or deactivating HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th ear Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the Mil Manager Data transfer to or from an external data medium GF You might have
56. floating tap holder 197 Without a floating tap holder 199 201 Test Run Executing 386 Overview 384 Text variables 363 Thread drilling milling 211 Thread milling fundamentals 203 Thread milling outside 219 Thread milling countersinking 207 TNCremo 407 TNCremoNT 407 Tool change 107 Tool Compensation Tool compensation Length 109 Radius 110 Tool Data Tool data Calling 106 Delta values 99 Enter them into the program 99 Entering into tables 100 Indexing 103 Tool length 98 Tool name 98 Tool number 98 Tool radius 99 Tool table Editing functions 102 Editing exiting 102 Input possibilities 100 Touch probe functions use with mechanical probes or dial gauges 428 Touch probe monitoring 170 Traverse reference points 40 Trigonometric functions 319 Trigonometry 319 Index Index U Universal drilling 188 192 USB devices connecting removing 74 User parameters Machine specific 400 V Version numbers 399 Visual display unit 29 W Workpiece measurement 425 430 Workpiece positions Absolute 57 Incremental 57 Workspace monitoring 383 386 448 Table of Cycles 1 BR W 200 201 Pecking Datum shift Dwell time Rotation Program call Contour definition Thread cutting Rough out SL Il Side finishing SL II Drilling Tapping Slot mi
57. inches per minute at which the tool center moves The maximum feed rates can be different for each machine axis and are set in machine parameters Input You can enter the feed rate in the TOOL CALL block and in every positioning block see Creating the program blocks with the path function keys on page 117 Rapid traverse If you wish to program rapid traverse enter F MAX To enter F MAX press the ENT key or the F MAX soft key when the dialog question FEED RATE F appears on the TNC screen e To move your machine at rapid traverse you can also program the corresponding numerical value e g F30000 Unlike FMAX this rapid traverse remains in effect not only in the individual block but in all blocks until you program a new feed rate Duration of effect A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until a block with a different feed rate is reached F MAX is only effective in the block in which it is programmed After the block with F MAX is executed the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value Changing during program run You can adjust the feed rate during program run with the feed rate override knob F 96 5 Programming Tools il Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rom in a TOOL CALL block Programmed change In the part program you can change the spindle speed in a TOOL CALL block by entering the spi
58. key row In the right hand window 2 the TNC shows the network drives available for access With the soft keys described below you can define the connection for each drive Establish the network connection If the connection is active the TNC marks the Mnt column Delete network connection Automatically establish network connection whenever the TNC is switched on The TNC marks the Auto column if the connection is established automatically Use the PING ping function to test your network connection If you press the NETWORK INFO soft key the TNC displays the current network settings HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 MOUNT DEVICE UNMOUNT DEVICE AUTO MOUNT NETWORK INFO Manual operation Programming Mount Auto Mount point Mount Device 1 HOME 2 v Pe N Nde 1PC5312 work versions NNde 1PC5323 transfer gt 4 MOUNT UNMOUNT AUTO NETWORK DEFINE CONNECTY PING NETWORK DEVICE DEVICE DISCONN INFO CONNECTN EDIT NETWORK CONNECTN a a 73 th ear Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the Mil Manager USB devices on the TNC Backing up data from or loading onto the TNC is especially easy with USB devices The TNC supports the following USB block devices Disk drives with the FAT VFAT file system Memory sticks with the FAT VFAT file system Hard disks with the FAT VFAT file system CD ROM drives with the Joliet ISO 9
59. o il 8 3 Cycles for mi Pockets Studs and Slots X 50 100 40 30 20 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool for roughing finishing Define slotting mill Call the tool for roughing finishing Retract the tool 2 44 8 Programming Cycles il 7 CYCL DEF 213 STUD FINISHING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 30 DEPTH Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q207 250 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 20 32ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q216 50 CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q217 50 CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q218 90 FIRST SIDE LENGTH Q219 80 SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q220 0 sCORNER RADIUS Q221 5 sOVERSIZE 8 CYCL CALL M3 9 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 CYCE DER 5 1 SET UP CYCL DEF 5 2 DEPTH 30 CYCL DEF 5 3 PLNGNG 5 F250 CYCL DEF 5 4 RADIUS 25 CYCL DEF 5 5 F400 DR L Z 2 RO F MAX M99 L Z 250 RO F MAX M6 TOOL CALL 2 Z 5000 CYCL DEF 211 CIRCULAR SLOT Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 20 DEPTH Q207 250 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q202 5 PECKING DEPTH Q215 0 sMACHINING OPERATION Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 100 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q216 50 CENTER IN 1ST AXIS Q217 50 CENTER IN 2ND AXIS Q244 80 PITCH CIRCLE DIA Q219 12 SECOND SIDE LENGTH Q245 45 STARTING ANGLE Q248 90 ANGULAR LENGTH HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define cycle for machining the contour outside Call cycle for machining the contour outside Define CIRCULAR POCKET
60. of the tangent Determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side Example Q12 ATAN Q50 Powers of values Example Q15 373 Constant pi 3 14159 Example Q15 PI Natural logarithm LN of a number Base 2 7183 Example Q15 LN Q11 Logarithm of a number base 10 Example Q33 LOG Q22 Exponential function 2 7183 to the power of n Example Q1 EXP Q12 Negate multiplication by 1 Example Q2 NEG Q1 Truncate decimal places Form an integer Example Q3 INT Q42 Absolute value of a number Example Q4 ABS Q22 Truncate places before the decimal point Form a fraction Example Q5 FRAC Q23 Check algebraic sign of a number Example Q12 SGN Q50 If result for 012 1 then 050 gt 0 If result for 012 1 then Q50 lt 0 Calculate modulo value Example Q12 400 360 Result 012 40 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ATAN EA PI FRAC e Entering Formulas Directly j il _ Entering Formulas Directly Rules for formulas Mathematical formulas are programmed according to the following rules Higher level operations are performed first Ist calculation 5 3 15 2nd calculation 2 10 20 3 Calculation step 15 20 35 or Ist calculation 10 squared 100 2nd calculation 3 to the power of 3 27 3 Calculation step 100 27 73 Distributive law for calculating with parentheses a b c a
61. paths for approach and departure go through an auxiliary point Py that the TNC calculates from your input in the APPR or DEP block The TNC moves from the current position to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate last programmed First contour point Pa and last contour point Pe You program the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The last contour point Pe can be programmed with any path function If the APPR block also contains a Z axis coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working plane and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ch and Departure RESET START 6 3 Contour Appro End point PN 5 The position Py lies outside of the contour and results from your input in the DEP block If the DEP block also contains a Z axis E coordinate the TNC will first move the tool to Py in the working S plane and then move it to the entered depth in the tool axis O Abbreviation Meaning a APPR Approach Lo e DEP Departure L Line A Circle T Tangential smooth connection N Normal perpendicular CS The TNC does not check whether the programmed contour will be damaged when moving from the actual position to the auxiliary point Py Use the test graphics to simulate approach and departure before executing the part program With the APPR LT APPR LN and APPR CT functions the TNC moves the tool from
62. point pe lt P1 P2 or P3 of a circular arc Auxiliary points near a contour X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a straight line x Pov X and Y coordinates of an auxiliary point near a circular arc PDY Distance auxiliary point circular arc Distance auxiliary point straight line Example NC blocks 6 Programming Programming Contours il Relative data Data whose values are based on another contour element are called relative data The soft keys and program words for entries begin with the letter R for Relative The figure at right shows the entries that should be programmed as relative data CS The coordinates and angles for relative data are always programmed in incremental dimensions You must also enter the block number of the contour element on which the data are based The block number of the contour element on which the relative data are based can only be located up to 64 positioning blocks before the block in which you program the reference If you delete a block on which relative data are based the TNC will display an error message Change the program first before you delete the block Data relative to block N End point coordinates 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C Cartesian Coordinates relative to block N Polar coordinates relative to block N Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ur Programming j il ur Programming 6 6 Path Conto
63. pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 209 TAPPING W CHIP BRKG Without a floating tap holder with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking 262 THREAD MILLING Cycle for milling a thread in pre drilled material 263 THREAD MLLNG CNTSNKG Cycle for milling a thread in pre drilled material and machining a countersunk chamfer 180 F a y a N o ul ma qs q Nj N N o o EO T N 2 a N o 3 a 263 JE 8 Programming Cycles il 264 THREAD DRILLING MLLNG 254 Cycle for drilling into the solid material with subsequent milling of the thread with a tool 265 HEL THREAD DRLG MLG 25 Cycle for milling the thread into the solid material BD 267 OUTSIDE THREAD MLLNG 257 Cycle for milling an external thread and machining a countersunk chamfer HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Mons and Thread Milling DRILLING Cycle 200 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance dwells there if a dwell time was entered and then moves at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first plunging depth 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed Q203 feed
64. programmed by the machine tool builder or by HEIDENHAIN Whenever the TNC comes to a block with FN 14 in the Program Run or Test Run mode it interrupts the program run and displays a message The program must then be restarted The error numbers are listed in the table below 0 299 FN 14 Error code 0 299 300 999 Machine dependent dialog 1000 1099 Internal error messages see table at right gt The machine tool builder can change the FN14 ERROR function Refer to your machine manual Example NC block The TNC is to display the text stored under error number 254 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 Spindle Tool axis is missing Tool radius too small Tool radius too large Range exceeded Start position incorrect ROTATION not permitted SCALING FACTOR not permitted MIRRORING not permitted Datum shift not permitted Feed rate is missing Entry value incorrect Wrong sign programmed Entered angle not permitted Touch point inaccessible Too many points Contradictory entry CYCL incomplete Plane wrongly defined Wrong axis programmed Wrong RPM Radius comp undefined Rounding off undefined Rounding radius too large Program start undefined Excessive subprogramming Angle reference missing No fixed c
65. programming numerical values in a part program you enter markers called O parameters You assign the values to the O parameters separately with the O parameter functions You can use the Q parameters for programming mathematical functions that control program execution or describe a contour Programming with O parameters is described in Chapter 10 114 6 Programming Programming Contours il 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Functions Programming tool movements for workpiece machining You create a part program by programming the path functions for the individual contour elements in sequence You usually do this by entering the coordinates of the end points of the contour elements given in the production drawing The TNC calculates the actual path of the tool from these coordinates and from the tool data and radius compensation The TNC moves all axes programmed in a single block simultaneously Movement parallel to the machine axes The program block contains only one coordinate The TNC thus moves the tool parallel to the programmed axis Depending on the machine tool the part program is executed by movement of either the tool or the machine table on which the workpiece is clamped Nevertheless you always program path contours as If the tool moves and the workpiece remains stationary Example r Path function for a straight line X 100 Coordinate of the end point The tool retains the Y and Z coord
66. rate F 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached 6 The tool is retracted from the hole bottom to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at rapid traverse FMAX 182 8 Programming Cycles il Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement If the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Dwell time at top 0210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 m x 3 D lt O 2 O O
67. rate for rotary tables in mm minn Cancel M116 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Contour filter Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Cancel M126 Maintain the position of the tool tip when positioning the tilted axes TCPM Cancel M126 Exact stop at nontangential contour transitions when positioning with rotary axes Cancel M134 Select tilting axes Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Suppress touch probe monitoring Delete modal program information Delete basic rotation Compensating the machine s kinematic configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block Cancel M144 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop Cancel M148 Suppress limit switch message Laser cutting functions HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 X X xp X X XIXI XIXI X il Comparison Touch probe cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel modes Calibrate the effective length X X Calibrate the effective radius X X Measure a basic rotation using a line X X Set the datum in any axis X X Set a corner as datum X X Set the center line as datum Set the circle center as datum X X Measure a basic rotation using two holes cylindrical studs Set the datum using four holes cylindrical studs Set circle center using three holes cylindrical studs 460 XI XIXI XIX X X X XJ X Comparison Touch probe cycles fo
68. rom and a feed rate of 350 mm min The tool length is to be programmed with an oversize of 0 2 mm the tool radius 2 with an oversize of 0 05 mm and the tool radius with an undersize of 1 mm The character D preceding L and R designates delta values Tool preselection with tool tables If you are working with tool tables use TOOL DEF to preselect the next tool Simply enter the tool number or a corresponding O parameter or type the tool name in quotation marks 106 5 Programming Tools il Tool change y The tool change function can vary depending on the TT individual machine tool The machine tool manual provides further information Tool change position The tool change position must be approachable without collision With the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 you can enter machine referenced rather than workpiece referenced coordinates for the tool change position If TOOL CALL 0 is programmed before the first tool call the TNC moves the tool spindle in the tool axis to a position that is independent of the tool length Manual tool change To change the tool manually stop the spindle and move the tool to the tool change position Move to the tool change position under program control Interrupt program run see Interrupting machining page 388 Change the tool Resume program run see Resuming program run after an interruption page 389 Automatic tool change If your machine tool h
69. service Te a i a ee ee ee an Sate POSITION MACHINE Program Run Duration of controlled operation since put INPUT Pen TIME E into service HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 403 12 7 Display Operating Times 12 8 Setting the Data Interfaces 12 8 Setting the Data Interfaces Serial interface on the TNC 320 The TNC 320 automatically uses the LSV2 transmission protocol for serial data transfer The LSV2 protocol is permanent and cannot be changed except for setting the baud rate machine parameter baudRateLsv2 You can also specify another type of transmission interface The settings described below are therefore effective only for the respectively indicated interface Function To set up a data interface select the file management PGM MGT and press the MOD key Press the MOD key again and enter the code number123 The TNC shows the user parameter GfgSerial Interface in which you can enter the following settings Setting the RS 232 interface Open the RS232 folder The TNC then displays the following settings Setting the baud rate baudRate You can set the BAUD RATE data transfer speed from 110 to 115 200 baud Set the protocol protocol The data transmission protocol controls the data flow of a serial transmission comperable with MP 5030 Standard dialog transfer STANDARD Blockwise data transfer BLOCKWISE Transmission without protocol RAW_DATA 404 Machine Parameter programming Basic data aaa iaie
70. stylus is deflected the TNC outputs an error message as soon as you attempt to move a machine axis Behavior with M141 The TNC moves the machine axes even if the touch probe is deflected This function is required if you wish to write your own measuring cycle in connection with measuring cycle 3 in order to retract the stylus by means of a positioning block after it has been deflected If you use M141 make sure that you retract the touch uy probe in the correct direction M141 functions only for movements with straight line blocks Effect M141 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M141 becomes effective at the start of the block 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Delete basic rotation M143 Standard behavior The basic rotation remains in effect until it is reset or is overwritten with a new value Behavior with M143 The TNC erases a programmed basic rotation from the NC program The function M143 is not permitted during a mid program tt Startup Effect M143 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M143 becomes effective at the start of the block Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 Standard behavior At an NC stop the TNC stops all traverse movements The tool stops moving at the point of interruption Behavior with M148 Z The M148 function must be enabled by the machine tool builder The TNC retracts the tool in the direction
71. surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the slot in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute value Center of the slot in the minor axis of the working plane First side length 0218 value parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Enter the length of the slot Second side length 0219 value parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 3 Cycles for MS aa Studs and Slots o il 8 3 Cycles for Mm ockets Studs and Slots 240 Angle of rotation 0224 absolute value Angle by which the entire slot is rotated The center of rotation lies in the center of the slot Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental value Infeed per cut O338 0 Finishing in one infeed gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Effective only during finishing If infeed for finishing is entered m X D 3 El o O zZ e z A 8 Programming Cycles il CIRCULAR SLOT oblong hole
72. the HEIDENHAIN FK tree contour programming does the necessary calculations automatically Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining You can also enter and test one program while the control is running another Compatibility The feature content of the TNC 320 is not the same as that of the TNC 4xx series and 1TNC 530 controls Part programs created on the HEIDENHAIN controls TNC 150 B and later can only run on the TNC 320 under a condition If NC blocks contain invalid elements the TNC will mark them during download as ERROR blocks 28 1 Introduction il 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Operating Panel Visual display unit The TNC is delivered with a 15 inch TFT color flat panel display see figure at top right 1 Header When the TNC is on the selected operating modes are shown in the screen header the machining mode at the left and the programming mode at right The currently active mode is displayed in the larger box where the dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear unless the TNC is showing only graphics 2 Soft keys In the footer the TNC indicates additional functions in a soft key row You can select these functions by pressing the keys immediately below them The lines immediately above the soft key row indicate the number of soft key rows that can be called with the black arrow keys to the right and left The line representing the active soft key row is highl
73. the actual position to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate that was last programmed With the APPR LCT function the TNC moves to the auxiliary point Py at the feed rate programmed with the APPR block If no feed rate is programmed yet before the approach block the TNC generates an error message 6 3 Contour Approg Polar coordinates You can also program the contour points for the following approach departure functions over polar coordinates APPR LT becomes APPR PLT APPR LN becomes APPR PLN APPR CT becomes APPR PCT APPR LCT becomes APPR PLCT DEP LCT becomes DEP PLCT Select by soft key an approach or departure function then press the orange P key Radius compensation The tool radius compensation is programmed together with the first contour point Pa in the APPR block The DEP blocks automatically discard the tool radius compensation Contour approach without radius compensation If you program the APPR block with RO the TNC will calculate the tool path for a tool radius of 0 mm and a radius compensation RR The radius compensation is necessary to set the direction of contour approach and departure in the APPR DEP LN and APPR DEP CT functions 120 6 Programming Programming Contours il Approaching on a straight line with tangential connection APPR LT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa on a straight line that connects t
74. the contour 391 11 6 Automatic Program Start 392 Function 392 11 7 Optional Block Skip 393 Function 393 Inserting the character 393 Erasing the character 393 11 8 Optional Program Run Interruption 394 Function 394 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 23 il 12 1 MOD Functions 396 Selecting the MOD functions 396 Changing the settings 396 Exiting the MOD functions 396 Overview of MOD functions 397 12 2 Software Numbers 398 Function 398 12 3 Entering Code Numbers 399 Function 399 12 4 Machine Specific User Parameters 400 Function 400 12 5 Position Display Types 401 Function 401 12 6 Unit of Measurement 402 Function 402 12 7 Display Operating Times 403 Function 403 12 8 Setting the Data Interfaces 404 Serial interface on the TNC 320 404 Function 404 Setting the RS 232 interface 404 Setting the baud rate baudRate 404 Set the protocol protocol 404 Set the data bits dataBits 405 Parity check parity 405 Setting the stop bits stopBits 405 Setting the handshake flowControl 405 Setting the operating mode of the external device fileSystem 406 Software for data transfer 407 12 9 Ethernet Interface 409 Introduction 409 Connection possibilities 409 Connecting the control to the network
75. the machine tool builder in a machine parameter Standard behavior The TNC references coordinates to the workpiece datum see Datum Setting Without a 3 D Touch Probe page 47 Behavior with M91 Machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 CES If you program incremental coordinates in an M91 block enter them with respect to the last programmed M91 position If no M91 position is programmed in the active NC block then enter the coordinates with respect to the current tool position The coordinate values on the TNC screen are referenced to the machine datum Switch the display of coordinates in the status display to REF see Status Displays page 33 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 M91 M92 hA Mi NY X Z Y 7 3 Programming machine referencedigordinates j il M91 M92 7 3 Programming nachine referencediordinates Behavior with M92 Additional machine datum Z In addition to the machine datum the machine tool builder can also define an additional machine based position as a reference point For each axis the machine tool builder defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum Refer to the machine manual for more information If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 S Radius com
76. the tool center away from the hole center HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 O N OO sane ll O O0 al O lt a Midd NOAA O N gl 9 pp EGE Jia Q204 Q203 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling 210 gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can Occur gt Feed rate for countersinking 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling m X D 3 2 o O zZ O ol A 8 Programming Cycles il THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Drilling 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate for plunging 3 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set up clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth 4 The tool then advances
77. to block 1 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Tool change Stop program run machine dependent function Spindle STOP Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective machine dependent function Constant contouring speed at corners Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine tool builder such as tool change position Reduce display of rotary axis to value under 360 Machine small contour steps Machine open contours completely Blockwise cycle call A N tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expire Cancel M101 Suppress error message for replacement tools Cancel M107 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Cancel M109 M110 XI XI XIXI X X X X X XI XI K K X M112 M113 M114 M115 M116 M117 M118 M120 M124 M126 M127 M128 M129 M134 M135 M138 M140 M141 M142 M143 M144 M145 M148 M149 M150 M200 M204 Enter contour transition between two contour elements Cancel M112 Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes Cancel M114 Feed
78. to set up the data interface before you can transfer data to an external data medium see Setting the Data Interfaces on page 404 Call the file manager MGT UINDON Select the screen layout for data transfer press the WINDOW soft key Select the desired directory in both halves of the screen In the left half of the screen for example 1 the TNC shows all files saved on its hard disk In the right half of the screen 2 it shows all files saved on the external data medium Use the SHOW FILES and SHOW TREE soft keys to switch between the folder view and file view Use the arrow keys to highlight the file s that you want to transfer Moves the highlight up and down within a window Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa If you wish to copy from the TNC to the external data medium move the highlight in the left window to the file to be transferred To transfer a single file position the highlight on the desired file To transfer several files Press the TAG soft key in the second soft key row see Marking files page 68 and mark the corresponding files With the back soft key exit the TAG function again TAG Program run Programming full sequence U Nnc_prog test H U nc_progN320N Hs 1I 7 File name Bytes Statusf File name Bytes Status u 1 4 Kreis Par h H rad5 h radius2 H Tah test320 h testastatur h 5 file s 13 73 GB 2
79. with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 211 Roughing 1 4 At rapid traverse the TNC positions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the right circle From there the tool is positioned to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool moves at the milling feed rate to the workpiece surface From there the cutter advances plunge cutting obliquely into the material to the other end of the slot The tool then moves at a downward angle back to the starting point again with oblique plunge cutting This process steps 2 to 3 is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached For the purpose of face milling the TNC moves the tool at the milling depth to the other end of the slot Finishing 5 The TNC advances the tool from the slot center tangentially to the contour of the finished part The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 and if so entered in more than one infeed The Starting point for the finishing process is the center of the right circle When the tool reaches the end of the contour it departs the contour tangentially At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance CS Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane During roughing the tool pl
80. with another infeed at the programmed feed rate 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached Countersinking at front 6 7 8 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the sinking depth at front The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 9 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut 10 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 11 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 12 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance tE Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth of thread countersinking depth or sinking depth at front determines the working direction The working direction is defined
81. working plane and the starting point for the first machining operation on the pitch circle Stopping angle Q246 absolute value Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the last machining operation on the pitch circle does not apply to complete circles Do not enter the same value for the stopping angle and starting angle If you enter the stopping angle greater than the starting angle machining will be carried out counterclockwise otherwise machining will be clockwise 248 8 Programming Cycles il gt Stepping angle 0247 incremental value Angle between two machining operations on a pitch circle If you enter an angle step of 0 the TNC will calculate the angle step from the starting and stopping angles and the number of pattern repetitions If you enter a value other than 0 the TNC will not take the stopping angle into account The sign for the angle step determines the working direction clockwise gt Number of repetitions 0241 Number of machining operations on a pitch circle gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Moving to clear
82. 0 R FMAX S CYCL_DEF 209 DRILLING meee Qz Z SET UP CLEARANCE 20 DEPTH 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG 2 5 PLUNGING DEPTH 50 5 Q211 0 5 7 END PGM 14 MM i Working with Cycles k il E Working with Cycles Cycles for pecking reaming boring counterboring A tapping and thread milling THREAD Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots POCKETS STUDS SLOTS Cycles for producing point patterns such as circular or a linear hole patterns SL Subcontour List cycles which allow the contour parallel machining of relatively complex contours O consisting of several overlapping subcontours cylinder surface interpolation Cycles for face milling of flat or twisted surfaces MULTIPASS i Coordinate transformation cycles which enable datum TRANSF shift rotation mirror image enlarging and reducing for various contours Special cycles such as dwell time program call ee CYCLES oriented spindle stop and tolerance Ce 178 If you use indirect parameter assignments in fixed cycles with numbers greater than 200 e g 0210 Q1 any change in the assigned parameter e g Q1 will have no effect after the cycle definition Define the cycle parameter e g Q210 directly in such cases If you define a feed rate parameter for fixed cycles greater than 200 then instead of entering a numerical value you can use soft keys to assign the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block FAUTO s
83. 1 50 H If you want to define an ISO program to be a cycle enter the file type behind the program name 12 Program name Enter the name of the program you PGM CALL want to call and if necessary the directory It is located In Call the program with CYCL CALL separate block or M99 blockwise or M89 executed after every positioning block Example Program call A callable program 50 is to be called into a program via a cycle call 294 7 CYCL DEF 12 0 PGM CALL LOT31 9 M99 A A OR A O A ORORO ORR OT e CO NON ONO NOOO NOOO OO NOOO 8 CYCL DEF 12 1 OR LOR OO OOO OOOO O OS O BEGIN PGM LOT31 MM END PGM LOT31 e ewe ee ee ee ee eee Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles il ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP Cycle 13 ll Machine and control must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle Cycle 13 is used internally for machining cycles 202 204 and 209 Please note that if required you must program Cycle 13 again in your NC program after one of the machining cycles mentioned above The control can control the machine tool spindle and rotate It to a given angular position Oriented spindle stops are required for Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes with infrared transmission Effect The angle of orientation d
84. 1 Tool Movements Path functions A workpiece contour is usually composed of several contour elements such as straight lines and circular arcs With the path functions you can program the tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs FK Free Contour Programming If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC and the dimensions given are not sufficient for creating a part program you can program the workpiece contour with the FK free contour programming and have the TNC calculate the missing data With FK programming you also program tool movements for straight lines and circular arcs Miscellaneous functions M With the TNC s miscellaneous functions you can affect Program run e g a program interruption Machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off Contouring behavior of the tool Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a program you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat If you wish to execute a specific program section only under certain conditions you also define this machining sequence as a subprogram In addition you can have a part program call a separate program for execution Programming with subprograms and program section repeats is described in Chapter 9 Programming with O parameters Instead of
85. 16 Pre position 117 Pecking 192 Deepened starting point 194 Pin layout for data interfaces 436 Plan view 377 PLC and NC synchronization 340 Pocket calculator 88 Pocket table 104 Point Patterns Circular 248 Linear 250 Overview 247 Point patterns Polar coordinates Approach depart contour 120 Fundamentals 56 Programming 136 Positioning With manual data input MDI 50 Principal axes 55 Probing cycles Manual operation mode 416 Probing cycles See Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Program Editing 80 Open new 76 Structure 75 Program call Program as subprogram 301 Via cycle 294 Program management See File management Program name See File management File name Program Run Executing 387 Interrupting 388 Mid program startup 390 Optional block skip 393 Overview 387 Resuming after an interruption 389 Program section repeat 300 Program sections copying 82 Programming tool movements 78 Projection in 3 planes 378 i Q Q parameter programming 314 363 Additional functions 325 Basic arithmetic assign add subtract multiply divide square root 317 Circle calculations 321 If then decisions 322 Programming notes 315 364 365 366 Trigonometric functions 319 Q Parameters Checking 324 Formatted output 328 Preassigned 360 Tran
86. 2 block 20 is repeated twice The program section between this block and LBL 1 block 15 is repeated once 04 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Repeating a subprogram Example NC blocks Program execution 1 Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 2 Subprogram 2 is called and executed 3 Program section between block 12 and block 10 is repeated twice Subprogram 2 is repeated twice 4 Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19 End of program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Beginning of program section repeat 1 9 5 Nesting Subprogram call The program section between this block and LBL1 block 10 is repeated twice Last block of the main program with M2 Beginning of subprogram End of subprogram o il Program sequence E Pre position the tool to the workpiece surface E Enter the infeed depth in incremental values Y Contour milling 100 Repeat downfeed and contour milling 75 30 20 Y Programming Examples Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Pre position in the working plane Pre position to the workpiece surface Ww 06 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il E Programming Examples HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Set label for program section repeat Infeed depth in incremental values in space Approach to the contour Contour Depart the contour Retract t
87. 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 220 221 230 231 232 240 247 251 292 456 Drilling Reaming Boring Universal drilling Back boring Universal pecking Tapping with floating tap holder Rigid tapping Bore milling Tapping with chip breaking Slot with reciprocating plunge Circular slot Rectangular pocket finishing Rectangular stud finishing Circular pocket finishing Circular stud finishing Point pattern on circle Point pattern on lines Multipass milling Ruled surface Face milling Centering Datum setting Rectangular pocket complete Circular pocket complete XI XIXI XIXI XIXI XIX X X X X X X X X X X X X X XI XI XIXI XIXI XI XI X X XI KX KX X X XI XI XI XI X XI XI X X X X XI X X X X XI X X X X X X X KL X XI X 253 254 262 263 264 265 267 Slot complete Circular slot complete Thread milling Thread milling counter sinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 X XI XIXI X X XI XI XI XI XI X o il Comparison Miscellaneous functions M00 M01 M02 M03 M05 M06 M08 MO9 M13 M14 M30 M89 M90 M91 M92 M94 M97 M98 M99 M101 M102 M107 M108 M109 M110 M111 458 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Clear status display depending on machine parameter Go
88. 22 and no ANGLE is in the tool table the TNC displays an error message gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each infeed gt Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during penetration gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed for milling in mm min Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles il Coarse roughing tool number 018 Number of the tool with which the TNC has already coarse roughed the contour If there was no coarse roughing enter 0 if you enter a value other than zero the TNC will only rough out the portion that could not be machined with the coarse roughing tool If the portion that is to be roughed cannot be approached from the side the TNC will plunge cut as in 019 For this purpose you must enter the tool length LCUTS in the tool table TOOL T see Tool Data page 98 and define the maximum plunging ANGLE of the tool The TNC will otherwise generate an error message Reciprocation feed rate Q19 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during reciprocating plunge cut Retraction feed rate 0208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after machining If you enter 0208 O the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in O12 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for finishing The starting point depends on the available space in the poc
89. 3 Tool Compensation 109 Introduction 109 Tool length compensation 109 Tool radius compensation 110 i i 6 1 Tool Movements 114 Path functions 114 FK Free Contour Programming 114 Miscellaneous functions M 114 Subprograms and program section repeats 114 Programming with Q parameters 114 6 2 Fundamentals of Path Functions 115 Programming tool movements for workpiece machining 115 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure 119 Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure 119 Important positions for approach and departure 119 Approaching on a Straight line with tangential connection APPR LT 121 Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN 121 Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT 122 Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT 122 Departing on a straight line with tangential connection DEP LT 123 Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN 123 Departure on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CT 124 Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT 124 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates 125 Overview of path functions 125 Straight Line L 125 Inserting a Chamter CHF between Two
90. 3 file s 13 73 GB PAGE PAGE SELECT COPY SELECT WINDOW SHOW b gt END t ii ABC gt xyz hE TREE 70 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Press the COPY soft key Confirm with the OK soft key or with the ENT key For long programs a status window appears on the TNC informing you of the copying progress WINDOW To end data transfer move the highlight into the left El window and then press the WINDOW soft key The standard file manager window is displayed again gt To select another directory in the split screen display press the SHOW TREE soft key If you press the SHOW FILES soft key the TNC shows the content of the selected directory HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th ear Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the Mil Manager Copying files into another directory Select the screen layout with the two equally sized windows To display directories in both windows press the SHOW TREE soft key In the right window Move the highlight to the directory to copy the files to and display the Tiles in this directory with the SHOW FILES soft key In the left window Select the directory with the files to copy and press the SHOW FILES soft key to display them Display the file marking functions TAG Move the highlight to the files to be copied and mark them You can mark several files in this way if desired copy Copy the marked files into the target di
91. 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pao and Thread Milling o il Bulli Peay pue Burd Bull 40 SIDAD Z 8 8 Programming Cycles il 204 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement Before the helical approach a compensating motion of the tool axis is carried out in order to begin at the programmed starting plane for the thread path Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset movements or in one continuous movement After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or If programmed to the 2nd set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling es and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling m x D 2 D O O O A 206 gt Nominal diameter 0335
92. 38 6 Programming Programming Contours il Shape of the helix The table below illustrates in which way the shape of the helix is determined by the work direction direction of rotation and radius compensation Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL olar Coordinates Right handed Z DR RR Left handed Z DR RL Right handed Z DR RL Left handed Z DR RR Programming a helix C Always enter the same algebraic sign for the direction of rotation DR and the incremental total angle IPA The tool may otherwise move in a wrong path and damage the contour Y nur e o Q ta ro A LO do For the total angle IPA you can enter a value from 5400 to 5400 If the thread has more than 15 revolutions program the helix in a program section repeat see Program Section Repeats page 300 P gt Polar coordinates angle Enter the total angle of tool traverse along the helix in incremental dimensions After entering the angle specify the tool axis with an axis selection key gt Coordinate Enter the coordinate for the height of the helix in incremental dimensions gt Direction of rotation DR Clockwise helix DR Counterclockwise helix DR Example NC blocks Thread M6 x 1 mm with 5 revolutions HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 139 il olar Coordinates 6 5 Path Contour De
93. 401 B 192 to 254 second PL 401 B Output O O to 30 32 to 62 first PL 401 B 64 to 94 second PL 401 B Counter C 48 to 79 Timer T O to 95 Byte B O to 4095 Word W O to 2047 Double word D 2048 to 4095 Now for the first time with the TNC 320 HEIDENHAIN has equipped a control with an expanded interface for communication between the PLC and NC This is a new symbolic Application Programmer Interface API The familiar previous PLC NC interface is also available and can be used if desired The machine tool builder decides whether the new or old TNC API is used Enter the name of the symbolic operand as string to wait for the defined condition of the symbolic operand The following conditions are permitted in the FN 20 block Equals Less than lt Greater than gt Less than or equal lt Greater than or equal gt 340 10 Programming O Parameters il Example Stop program run until the PLC sets marker 4095 to 1 Example Stop program run until the PLC sets the symbolic operand to 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 8 Additional Functions o il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add FN 25 PRESET Setting a new datum s This function can only be programmed if you have entered the code number 555343 see Entering Code Numbers page 399 With the function FN 25 PRESET it is possible to set a new datum in an axis of choice during program run Select a O parameter function Press the O key in the numer
94. 60 10 Programming Q Parameters il Spindle status 0110 The value of 0110 depends on which M function was last programmed for the spindle No spindle status defined 0110 1 MOS Spindle ON clockwise O110 0 M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise Q110 1 MO5 after MOS 0110 2 M05 after M04 Q110 3 Coolant on off Q111 MO8 Coolant ON Q111 1 MO9 Coolant OFF 0111 0 Overlap factor 0112 The overlap factor for pocket milling MP7430 is assigned to 0112 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program Q113 The value of parameter Q113 specifies whether the highest level NC program for nesting with PGM CALL is programmed in millimeters or inches Metric system mm 0ITS 0 Inch system inches Olis Tool length Q114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 i Preassigned O Parameters o il o Preassigned O Parameters Coordinates after probing during program run The parameters 0115 to 0119 contain the coordinates of the spindle position at the moment of contact during programmed measurement with the 3 D touch probe The coordinates are referenced to the datum that is currently active in the Manual operating mode The length and radius of the probe tip are not compensated in these coordinates X axis Q115 Y axis Q116 Z axis Q117 IVth axis Q118 Machine dependent Vth axis Q119 Machine dependent 362 10 Programming Q Parameters il 10 12 String Para
95. 62 Overwriting files 66 72 Renaming a file 69 Selecting a file 64 File status 63 FK Programming 143 Circular paths 146 Dialog Initiation 145 Fundamentals 143 Graphics 144 Inout possibilities Auxiliary points 150 Circle data 148 Closed contours 149 Direction and length of contour elements 147 End points 147 Relative data 151 Straight lines 146 FK programming Input possibilities Floor finishing 263 FN 25 PRESET Set a new datum 342 FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages 326 FN15 PRINT Formatted output of texts 328 FN18 SYSREAD Read system data 331 FN19 PLC Transfer values to the PLE 099 Index Index F FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization 340 FN23 CIRCLE DATA Calculating a circle from 3 points 321 FN24 CIRCLE DATA Calculating a circle from 4 points 321 Full circle 129 Fundamentals 54 G Graphic simulation 381 Graphics Display modes 377 During programming 85 Magnifying a detail 86 Magnitying details 380 H Hard disk 59 Helical interpolation 138 Helical thread drilling milling 215 Helix 138 Help with error messages 90 I Indexed tools 103 Information on formats 442 Interactive programming graphics 144 Interrupt machining 388 WING 530 28 L Look ahead 168 M M functions See Miscellaneous functions Machi
96. 660 file system The TNC automatically detects these types of USB devices when connected The TNC does not support USB devices with other file systems such as NTFS After connection the TNC displays an error message CS The TNC also displays an error message If you connect a USB hub In this case simply acknowledge the message with the CE key In theory you should be able to connect all USB devices with the file systems mentioned above to the TNC It problems occur nevertheless please contact HEIDENHAIN The USB devices appear as separate drives in the directory tree so you can use the file management functions described in the earlier chapters correspondingly In order to remove a USB device you must proceed as follows To call the file manager press the PGM MGT soft key Select the left window with the arrow key Use the arrow keys to select the USB device to be removed Scroll through the soft key row Select additional functions Select the function for removing USB devices The TNC removes the USB device from the directory tree Exit program management z U gt le Ds 000 4 In order to re establish a connection with a USB device that has been removed press the following soft key Select the function for reconnection of USB devices X 74 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il 4 4 Creating and Writing Programs Organization of an NC program in HEIDENHAIN con
97. 99 From Q To Q 14 CYCL DEF 5 8 CIRCULF 15 CYCL DEF 5 1 SET upz From Q To Q 16 CYCL DEF 5 2 DEPTH 1 17 CYCL DEF 5 3 PLNGNG1 Fromas To QS 19 CYCL DEF 5 5 F888 DR 18 CYCL DEF 5 4 RADIUS1 20 L 2 8 RO FMAX M99 21 L Z 2 RO FMAX _SaNceL 22 CYCL DEF 3 0 SLOT MI 23 CYCL DEF 3 1 SET UPZ 24 CYCL DEF 3 2 DEPTH 8 25 CYCL DEF 3 3 PLNGNGS F333 26 CYCL DEF 3 4 X 15 2 CYCL DEF 3 5 Y 90 28 CYCL DEF 3 6 F888 29 L X 10 Y 10 e di 30 L Z 2 RO FMAX 31 CYCL DEF 3 0 ator ie 10 Programming O Parameters 10 8 Additional Functions Overview Press the DIVERSE FUNCTION soft key to call the additional functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys FN14 ERROR ore Page 326 Output error messages ERROR FN16 F PRINT Page 328 Formatted output of texts or F PRINT O parameter values FN18 SYS DATUM READ Fie Page 331 Read system data READ FN19 PLC are Page 339 Transfer values to the PLC PLC FN20 WAIT FOR Page 340 Synchronize NC and PLC FOR FN25 PRESET FNZS Page 342 Set datum during program run DATUM FN29 PLC aoa Page 343 Transfer up to eight values to the PLC FN37 EXPORT ao Page 344 Export local O parameters or OS parameters into a calling program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add f il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages With the function FN14 ERROR you can call messages under program control The messages were
98. 99 function which is active only in the block in which it is programmed calls the last defined fixed cycle once You can program M99 at the end of a positioning block The TNC moves to this position and then calls the last defined fixed cycle If the ATEK M is to execute the cycle automatically after every positioning block program the cycle call with M89 To cancel the effect of M89 program M99 in the positioning block in which you move to the last starting point or Define with CYCL DEF a new fixed cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 E Working with Cycles i il ing d Thread Mill apping an 8 2 Cycles for Drilling 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling Overview 200 DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 201 REAMING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 202 BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking and decrementing 204 BACK BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking and advanced stop distance 208 BORE MILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 206 TAPPING NEW With a floating tap holder with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 207 RIGID TAPPING NEW Without a floating tap holder with automatic
99. AND OR 10 Programming O Parameters il SOL FETCH SQL FETCH reads the row addressed with INDEX from the result set and places the table entries in the bound assigned O parameters The result set is addressed with the HANDLE SQL FETCH takes into account all columns entered in the Select command gt Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or index too large SQL FETCH Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row number within the result set The table entries of this row are read and are transferred into the bound parameters If you do not enter an index the first row is read n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the O parameter containing the index HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example Row number is transferred in a Example Row number is programmed directly Tables with SQL Commands y 10 9 Acce il 10 9 A Tables with SQL Commands SOL UPDATE SQL UPDATE transfers the data prepared in the Q parameters into the row of the result set addressed with INDEX The existing row in the result set is completely overwritten SQL UPDATE takes into account all columns entered in the Select command gt Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the r
100. ATION function is not available after a program interruption Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M104 With M140 MB move back you can enter a path in the direction of the tool axis for departure from the contour HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 hom 0 gt os 00 O po gt sj Q 74 Miscellaneous Functions j il ontouring Behavior Y 2 me O 5 LL Y 5 O amp O N Input If you enter M140 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog and asks for the desired path of tool departure from the contour Enter the requested path that the tool should follow when departing the contour or press the MAX soft key to move to the limit of the traverse range In addition you can program the feed rate at which the tool traverses the entered path If you do not enter a feed rate the TNC moves the tool along the entered path at rapid traverse Effect M140 is effective only in the block in which it is programmed M140 becomes effective at the start of the block Example NC blocks Block 250 Retract the tool 50 mm from the contour Block 251 Move the tool to the limit of the traverse range With M140 MB MAX you can only retract in positive direction Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 Standard behavior When the
101. C 320 14 1 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces 436 RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices 436 Non HEIDENHAIN devices 437 Ethernet interface RJ45 socket 437 14 2 Technical Information 438 14 3 Exchanging the Buffer Battery 443 26 TOOL CALL 1 51000 L X Yt8 RR FRAX MJ L 2 10 RO F9999 CE X B T B C X4 47 908 Y1 747 DR RA L x 10 538 Y1 23 938 RRA CC X 29 Y1 3238 E X 10 591 1 359 707 OR RE L x47 153 Y1 59 553 RE k Z2Z Y B81 6393 2 16 818 Y1 75 77 DE RRA x 12 5 Y1 87 5 1 12 8 Y 188 ORF 2 12 RRA K 12 8 Y1 87 85 1 1 The 1 1 The TNC 320 HEIDENHAIN TNC controls are workshop oriented contouring controls that enable you to program conventional machining operations right at the machine in an easy to use conversational programming language The TNC 320 is designed for milling and drilling machine tools with up to 4 axes optionally 5 axes Instead of the fourth or fifth axis you can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control Keyboard and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the functions are fast and easy to use Programming HEIDENHAIN conversational format HEIDENHAIN conversational programming is an especially easy method of writing programs Interactive graphics illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC
102. C decreases the plunging depth 0202 after each infeed gt No of breaks before retracting 0213 Number of chip breaks after which the TNC is to withdraw the tool from the hole for chip release For chip breaking the TNC retracts the tool each time by the value in Q256 gt Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental value If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 gt Dwell time at depth Q211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter 0208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q206 Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental value Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Q203 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling m x 3 2 D O E O O o o il 2 BACK BORING Cycle 204 x Machine and control must be specially prepared by the 2 machine tool builder for use of this cycle Z pi E Special boring bars for upward cutting are required for this oD cycle LJ This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of the workpiece E 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface D 2 The TNC then orients the s
103. C positions the tool in the spindle axis to the set up clearance over the current infeed depth and then moves at the pre positioning feed rate directly back to the starting point in the next line The TNC calculates the offset from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then returns to the current infeed depth and moves in the direction of the next end point 2 The milling process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance CS Before programming note the following Enter the 2nd set up clearance in 0204 so that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 6 w for Multipass Milling o il 8 6 M for Multipass Milling E w N 276 IE Machining strategy 0 1 2 0389 Specify how the TNC is to machine the surface 0 Meander machining stepover at positioning feed rate outside the surface to be machined 1 Meander machining stepover at feed rate for milling within the surface to be machined 2 Line by line mac
104. CT DR Select the first last block of the section you wish to copy 18 FGT BR RES ccx 78 corso To mark the first last block Press the SELECT BLOCK soft key The 22 OS A A TNC then highlights the first character of the block and 22 L 21100 R FHAX mae superimposes the soft key CANCEL SELECTION er Move the highlight to the last first block of the program section you ot ze wish to copy or delete The TNC shows the marked blocks in a 31 END PGM EX11 MM different color You can end the marking function at any time by CANCEL DELETE insert copy p ME pressing the CANCEL SELECTION soft key A O ee ee P To copy the selected program section press the COPY BLOCK soft key To delete the selected section press the DELETE BLOCK soft key The TNC stores the selected block Using the arrow keys select the block after which you wish to insert the copied deleted program section CS To insert the section into another program select the corresponding program using the file manager and then mark the block after which you wish to insert the copied block To insert the block press the INSERT BLOCK soft key To end the marking function press the CANCEL SELECTION soft key 82 A Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Switch marking function on SELECT BLOCK Switch marking function off CANCEL SELECTION Delete marked block BELEE BLOCK Insert bl
105. CT DR R11 CCX 28 14 FCT DR Os CCX 8 15 FCT DR 16 FCT DR Ras CCX 78 1 Y 40 Z 0 F2222 View s ES c sa cos ra a ms x sart 1 ex o Truncate integers FRAC Modulus operator MOD Select view Display mode Delete value DEL To transfer the calculated value into the program Select the word into which the calculated value is to be transferred by using the arrow keys Superimpose the on line calculator by using the CALC key and perform the desired calculation Press the actual position capture key for the TNC to superimpose a soft key row Press the CALC soft key for the TNC to transfer the value into the active Input box and to close the calculator HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 7 Integrated ii a 4 8 The e Messages 4 8 The Error Messages Display of errors The TNC generates error messages when It detects problems such as Incorrect data input Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine Incorrect use of the touch probe system When an error occurs it is displayed in red type in the header Long and multi line error messages are displayed in abbreviated form If an error occurs In the background mode the word Error is displayed in red type Complete information on all pending errors is shown in the error window If a rare processor check error should occur the TNC automatically opens the error window You cannot remove such an error Sh
106. Connection Move to the circle end point circle starting point Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential Connection Retract in the tool axis end program 135 6 4 Path contours a Coordinates i dolar Coordinates 6 5 Path Contour 6 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Overview With polar coordinates you can define a position in terms of its angle PA and its distance PR relative to a previously defined pole CC see Fundamentals page 143 Polar coordinates are useful with Positions on circular arcs Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees e g bolt hole circles Overview of path functions with polar coordinates Line LP P Straight line Polar radius polar angle of the straight line end point Circular Arc CP P Circular path around circle center Polar angle of the arc end point pole CC to arc end point direction of rotation Circular Arc CTP P Circular arc with tangential Polar radius polar angle of the arc connection to the preceding end point contour element Helical interpolation P Combination of a circular and a Polar radius polar angle of the arc linear movement Polar coordinate origin Pole CC end point coordinate of the end point in the tool axis You can define the pole CC anywhere in the part program before blocks containing polar coordinates Enter the pole in Cartesian coordinates as a circle center in a CC block E Coordinates CC Enter Carte
107. Cycles il SCALING FACTOR Cycle 11 The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances Effect The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display The scaling factor has an effect on E All three coordinate axes at the same time Dimensions in cycles Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the contour Scaling factor Enter the scaling factor SCL The TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL factor as described under Effect above Enlargement SCL greater than 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction SCL less than 1 down to 0 000 001 Cancellation Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 36 Example NC blocks 28 co 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 IE Before programming note the following Coordinate axes sharing coordinates for arcs must be enlarged or reduced by the same factor You can program each coordinate axis with its own axis specific scaling factor In addition you can enter the coordinates of a center for all scaling factors The size of the c
108. EPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The following prerequisite applies for the 2nd side length 2nd side length greater than 2 x rounding radius stepover factor k Use the machine parameter suppressDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision 20 60 100 Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles il Calculations Set up clearance 1 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Depth 2 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Plunging depth 3 incremental value Infeed per cut The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool during penetration First side length 4 incremental value Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane 2nd side length 5 Pocket width Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Clockwise DR Climb milling with M3 DR Up cut milling with M3 Rounding radius Radius for the pocket corners If radius O is entered the pocket corners will be rounded with the radius of the cutter Stepover factor k Kx R K Overlap factor preset in the PocketOverlap machine parameter
109. G Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il Tool change Call tool drill New depth for drilling New plunging depth for drilling Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern Tool change Call tool reamer Cycle definition REAMING Programming Examples Call subprogram 1 for the entire hole pattern End of main program Beginning of subprogram 1 Entire hole pattern Move to starting point for group 1 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call subprogram 2 for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call subprogram 2 for the group End of subprogram 1 Beginning of subprogram 2 Group of holes 1st hole with active fixed cycle Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 2 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 311 il 10 1 Principle and Overview 10 1 Principle and Overview You can program an entire family of parts in a single part program You do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters can represent information such as Coordinate values Feed rates Spindle speeds Cycle data Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined with mathematical functions You can also use O parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on logical conditions
110. GM EX11 MM M13 00 000 RL CX CCY D35 0 0 000 6 3 0 000 Xx M30 0 50 000 ES _ END 6 Programming Programming Contours Initiating the FK dialog If you press the gray FK button the TNC displays the soft keys you can use to initiate an FK dialog See the following table Press the FK button a second time to deselect the soft keys If you Initiate the FK dialog with one of these soft keys the TNC shows additional soft key rows that you can use for entering known coordinates directional data and data regarding the course of the contour Straight line with tangential connection Straight line without tangential connection Circular arc with tangential connection Circular arc without tangential connection Pole for FK programming mS Se HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ur Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C o il ur Programming Q d d Su LL xX LL Y de nur Q Q me 0 o lo Free programming of straight lines Straight line without tangential connection FL To display the soft keys for free contour programming press the FK key To initiate the dialog for free programming of straight lines press the FL soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys Enter all known data in the block by using these soft keys The FK graphic displays the programmed contour element in red until sufficient data is entered
111. HEIDENHAIN HEIDENHAIN operation Programming User s Manual pane sane HEIDENHAIN St Conversational CUR TIME TIME1 TIMEZ ee en en Programming T 10 Z S 8 mm min Our 43 5 MS RT E 0 S IST ST 1 500 SENm TNC 320 3 MM ES Ea gs NC Software 340 551 01 English en 3 2006 ne Controls on the visual display unit Split screen layout Switch between machining or programming modes Soft keys for selecting functions in screen El ES LA Switch the soft key rows Machine operating modes Manual Operation Electronic Handwheel Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Program Run Single Block Program Run Full Sequence 0008 J O o 3 5 amp O o Programming and Editing Test Run UN im ogram file management TNC functions Select or delete programs and files External data transfer Define program call select datum and point tables MOD Functions TA Show help texts and illustrations Display all current error messages awe Pocket calculator Ov vu om Bowe PS 45 Moving the highlight going directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Move highlight mm Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions O Open the screen keyboard or a drop down menu Override control knobs for feed rate spindle speed 100 100 MW F Programming path movements Approach depart conto
112. ILE NAME Name with an extension separated by a dot file type BYTE File size in bytes STATUS File properties E Program is selected in the Programming and Editing mode of operation S Program is selected in the Test Run mode of operation M Program is selected in a Program Run mode of operation La File is protected against editing and erasure DATE Date the Tile was last changed TIME Time the file was last changed HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Program run full sequence Programming DY RSZ3Z H I N U nc_prog test H File name Bytes Status Date ime a 1 h 17 01 2006 14 15 22 173 17 01 2006 14 15 22 O 15110 12 81 2006 14 19 43 930 25 10 2005 10 50 09 840 30 09 2005 07 48 05 148 M 02 11 2005 07 39 11 5 file s 13 73 GB vacant SELECT WINDOW BE TYPE th ear Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the Mil Manager Selecting drives directories and files MGT Call the file manager With the arrow keys or the soft keys you can move the highlight to the desired position on the screen Moves the highlight from the left to the right window and vice versa Moves the highlight one page up or down within a window Step 1 Select drive Move the highlight to the desired drive in the left window Select a drive Press the SELECT soft key or the ENT a key or ENT Step 2 Select a directory Move t
113. In conjunction with FK programming you can also combine contours that do not have NC compatible dimensions with Q parameters Q parameters are designated by the letter O and a number between O and 1999 They are grouped according to various ranges Freely applicable parameters globally effective 01600 to for all programs stored in the TNC memory 01999 Freely applicable parameters as long as no 00 to 099 overlapping with SL cycles can occur globally effective for the respective program Parameters for special TNC functions 0100 to 0199 Parameters that are primarily used for cycles 0200 to globally effective for all programs that are stored 01399 in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for call active 01400 to OEM cycles globally effective for all programs 01499 that are stored in the TNC memory Parameters that are primarily used for DEF 01500 to active OEM cycles globally effective for all 01599 programs that are stored in the TNC memory 314 10 Programming O Parameters il Programming notes You can mix O parameters and fixed numerical values within a program f Some Q parameters are always assigned the same data by the TNC For example 0108 is always assigned the current tool radius see Preassigned O Parameters page 360 Calling O parameter functions When you are writing a part program press the Q key in the numeric keypad for numerical input and axis selecti
114. L TABLE POCKET TABLE EDIT oFF on Selecting operation PGM MGT To select the tool table press the TOOL TABLE soft key To select the pocket table press the POCKET TABLE soft key Set the EDIT soft key to ON a pocket table in the Programming and Editing mode of Call the file manager To select the file type press the SELECT TYPE soft key To show files of the type TCH press the soft key TCH FILES second soft key row Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key 00000009 PLC 104 Pocket number of the tool in the tool magazine Tool number Display of the tool name from TOOL T Special tool ST with a large radius requiring several pockets in the tool magazine If your special tool takes up pockets in front of and behind its actual pocket these additional pockets need to be locked in column L status L Fixed tool number The tool is always returned to the same pocket in the tool magazine Locked pocket see also column ST Information on this tool pocket that is to be sent to the PLC Tool number Special tool Fixed pocket Yes ENT No NO ENT Pocket locked Yes ENT No NO ENT PLC status 5 Programming Tools il Select beginning of table BEGIN gt Select end of table m Z k v D Qo m Select previous page in table v D Qo m Select next page in table Reset po
115. LL block In narrow areas the TNC may not be able to carry out pilot drilling with a tool that is larger than the rough out tool Process 1 2 The tool drills from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F When it reaches the first plunging depth the tool retracts at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position and advances again to the first plunging depth minus the advanced stop distance t The advanced stop distance is automatically calculated by the control Ata total hole depth of up to 30 mm t 0 6 mm At a total hole depth exceeding 30 mm t hole depth 50 E Maximum advanced stop distance 7 mm The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate F The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached After a dwell time at the hole bottom the tool is returned to the starting position at rapid traverse FMAX for chip breaking Application Cycle 21 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points It accounts for the allowance for side and the allowance for floor as well as the radius of the rough out tool The cutter infeed points also serve as starting points for roughing 21 Plunging depth 010 incremental value Dimension E 1 by which the tool drills in each infeed negative sign for negative working direction gt Feed rate for plunging 011 Traversing speed in mm min during drilling gt Rough out t
116. METER The TOUCH PROBE TS Manual operation Programming TNC always uses the values from the touch probe management even Intrerea cante probe T it values are also entered in the tool table Spindie ansie 191 f z 0 D C Make sure that you have activated the correct tool number ee a M before using the touch probe regardless of whether you Sabi o ON CO wish to run the touch probe cycle in automatic mode or ON s manual mode 0 000 Z 24 123 E o F mm min Our 180 MS l ke T r Mir A CONFIRM DISCARD END HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 419 13 2 Calibrating a Touch Trigger Probe Compensating Workpiece Misalignment 13 3 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment Introduction The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by computing a basic rotation For this purpose the TNC sets the rotation angle to the desired angle with respect to the reference axis in the working plane See figure at right oe Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle reference axis when measuring workpiece misalignment To ensure that the basic rotation is calculated correctly during program run program both coordinates of the working plane in the first positioning block You can also use a basic rotation in conjunction with the PLANE function In this case first activate the basic A B rotation and then the PLANE function Measuring the basic rotation Select the probe function
117. NC blocks GF For incremental coordinates enter the same sign for DR and PA HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 137 il Polar Coordinates 6 5 Path Contour Circular Path CTP with Tangential Connection The tool moves on a circular path starting tangentially from a preceding contour element P gt Polar coordinates radius PR Distance from the arc x end point to the pole CC Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point Example NC blocks Ss The pole CC is not the center of the contour arc Helical interpolation A helix is a combination of a circular movement in a main plane and a linear movement perpendicular to this plane A helix is programmed only in polar coordinates Application Large diameter internal and external threads Lubrication grooves Calculating the helix To program a helix you must enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions and the total height of the helix For calculating a helix that is to be cut in an upward direction you need the following data Thread revolutions n Thread revolutions thread overrun at thread beginning and end Total height h Thread pitch P times thread revolutions n Incremental total Number of revolutions times 360 angle for angle IPA beginning of thread angle for thread overrun Starting coordinate Z Pitch P times thread revolutions thread overrun at start of thread 1
118. NC then displays the following dialog TNC is started TNC message that the power was interrupted clear the message The PLC program of the TNC is automatically compiled Switch on external de voltage The TNC checks the functioning of the EMERGENCY STOP circuit Cross the reference points manually in the displayed sequence For each axis press the machine START button or x Y Cross the reference points in any sequence Press and hold the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed y If your machine is equipped with absolute encoders you TT can leave out traversing the reference mark In such a case the TNC is ready for operation immediately after the machine control voltage is switched on A 0 2 Manual Operation and Setup il The TNC is now ready for operation in the Manual Operation mode Switch off To prevent data being lost at switch off you need to shut down the operating system as follows Select the Manual Operation mode TFN Select the function for shutting down confirm again with the YES soft key When the TNC displays the message NOW IT IS SAFE TO TURN POWER OFF in a Superimposed window you may cut off the power supply to the TNC HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 2 1 Switch On Swi oF 2 2 Moving the Machin Mes 2 2 Moving the Machine Axes Note k Traversing with the machine axis
119. Nominal thread diameter gt Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Threads per step 0355 Number of thread revolutions by which the tool is offset see figure at lower right 0 one 360 helical path to the depth of thread 1 continuous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by 0355 multiplied by the pitch gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M03 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Q355 gt 1 E 8 Programming Cycles il THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 1
120. O Thread depth too large Missing calibration data Tolerance exceeded Block scan active ORIENTATION not permitted 3 D ROT not permitted Activate 3 D ROT Enter depth as a negative value 0303 not defined in measuring cycle Tool axis not allowed Calculated values incorrect Contradictory measuring points Clearance height entered incorrectly Contradictory type of plunging Machining cycle not permitted HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add j il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add 1085 Line is write protected 1086 Oversize greater than depth 1087 No point angle defined 1088 Contradictory data 1089 Slot position O not permitted 1090 Enter infeed unequal O FN 16 F PRINT Formatted output of texts or O parameter values The function FN16 F PRINT transfers O parameter values and texts in a selectable format through the data interface for example to a printer If you save the values internally or send them to a computer the TNC saves the data in the file that you defined in the FN 16 block To output the formatted texts and Q parameter values create a text file with the TNC s text editor In this file you then define the output format and O parameters you want to output Example of a text file to define the output format TEST RECORD IMPELLER CENTER OF GRAVITY DATE 2d 2d 4d DAY MONTH YEAR4 TIME 2d 2d 2d HOUR MIN SEC NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 NRK RRR RR R
121. OUT essential 22 Page 262 oe 23 FLOOR FINISHING optional 23 Page 263 EP li 24 SIDE FINISHING optional 24 Page 264 a amp CONTOUR Cycle 14 All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are listed in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY ce Before programming note the following Cycle 14 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program You can list up to 12 subprograms subcontours in Cycle 14 14 Label numbers for the contour Enter all label LBL 1 N numbers for the individual subprograms that are to be superimposed to define the contour Confirm every label number with the ENT key When you have entered all numbers conclude entry with the END key 256 8 Programming Cycles il Overlapping contours Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form a new contour You can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it by an island Subprograms Overlapping pockets iE The subsequent programming examples are contour subprograms that are called by Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY in a main program Pockets A and B overlap The TNC calculates the points of intersection S4 and S They do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as full circles HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 5 SL Cycles Example NC blocks e e e oO ao O Le e e Q Q Q Q 3 3 N pS Y Y e
122. PLACE soft key To skip the text and move to its next occurrence press the FIND soft key EXECUTE End the search function 84 A Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il 4 5 Interactive Programming Graphics Generating Not generating graphics during programming While you are writing the part program you can have the TNC generate a 2 D pencil trace graphic of the programmed contour To switch the screen layout to displaying program blocks to the left and graphics to the right press the SPLIT SCREEN key and PGM GRAPHICS soft key AUTO Set the AUTO DRAW soft key to ON While you are a entering the program lines the TNC generates each path contour you program in the graphics window in the right screen half If you do not wish to have graphics generated during programming set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF Even when AUTO DRAW ON is active graphics are not generated for program section repeats Generating a graphic for an existing program Use the arrow keys to select the block up to which you want the graphic to be generated or press GOTO and enter the desired block number To generate graphics press the RESET START soft sera key Additional functions Generate a complete graphic E Generate interactive graphic blockwise START SINGLE JJ Generate a complete graphic or complete It after RESET START sah Stop the programming graphics This soft key only
123. Q112 361 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the program 0113 Tool length 0114 361 Coordinates after probing during program run 362 10 12 String Parameters 363 Working with string parameters 363 Assigning string parameters 363 String processing functions 364 oe 361 Concatenation of string parameters 364 Exporting machine parameters 365 Converting a numerical value to a string parameter 365 Converting a string parameter to a numerical value 365 Reading a substring from a string parameter 365 Checking a string parameter 366 Reading the length of a string parameter 366 Reading the alphabetic order 366 Reading system strings 366 11 1 Graphics 376 Function 376 Overview of display modes 377 Plan view 377 Projection in 3 planes 378 3 D view 3 9 Magnifying details 380 Repeating graphic simulation 381 Measuring the machining time 382 11 2 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space 399 Function 383 11 3 Functions for Program Display 384 Overview 384 11 4 Test Run 385 Function 385 11 5 Program Run 387 Function 387 Run a part program 387 Interrupting machining 388 Moving the machine axes during an interruption 388 Resuming program run after an interruption 389 Mid program startup block scan 390 Returning to
124. RR RRR RR RRR RRR RRR RRR RK RRR RRR RRR RR IRM o f X1 9 3LF Q31 Y1 9 3LF Q32 Z1 9 3LF Q33 NIkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 328 10 Programming O Parameters il When you create a text file use the following formatting functions ad Define the output format for texts and variables between the quotation marks 9 3LF Define format for Q parameter 9 places in total with decimal point three of which are decimal places long floating decimal number S Format for text variable Separation character between output format and parameter 7 End of block character The following functions allow you to include the following additional information in the protocol log file CALL_PATH Gives the path for the NC program where you will find the FN16 function Example Measuring program S CALL_PATH M_CLOSE Closes the file to which you are writing with FN16 Example M_CLOSE L_ENGLISH Display the text only in English conversational L_GERMAN Display the text only in German conversational L CZECH Display text only in Czech conversational L_FRENCH Display text only in French conversational L_ITALIAN Display text only in Italian conversational L_SPANISH Display text only in Spanish conversational L_SWEDISH Output text only in Swedish conversational L_DANISH Display text only in Danish conversational L_FINNISH Display text only in Finnish conversational L_DUTCH Display the text only in Dutch
125. TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for EXECUTE EEE E End the search function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 83 Find Replace any text gt The find replace function is not possible if a program is protected the program is currently being run by the TNC When using the REPLACE ALL function ensure that you do not accidentally replace text that you do not want to change Once replaced such text cannot be restored If required select the block containing the word you wish to find Select the Search function The TNC superimposes the search window and displays the available search functions in the soft key row SEARCH Activate the Replace function The TNC superimposes REPLACE a window for entering the text to be inserted Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive Then confirm with the ENT key Enter the text to be inserted Please note that the entry is case sensitive Start the search process The TNC displays the available search options in the soft key row see the table of search options CONTINUE 4 4 Creating and Wri T Programs TORE If required change the search options o Start the search process The TNC moves to the next occurrence of the text you are searching for EXECUTE To replace the text and then move to the next occurrence of the text press the REPLACE soft key To replace all text occurrences press the RE
126. The name must end with a colon File system File system type NFS Network File System SMB Windows network NFS option rsize Packet size in bytes for data reception wsize Packet size for data transmission in bytes time0 Time in tenths of a second after which the control repeats an unanswered Remote Procedure Call soft YES repeats the Remote Procedure Call until the NFS server answers If NO is entered it is not repeated 412 12 MOD Functions SMB option Options that concern the SMB file system type Options are given without space characters separated only by commas Pay attention to capitalization Options ip IP address of the Windows PC to which the control is to be connected username User name with which the control is to log on workgroup Work group under which the control is to log on password Password with which the TNC is to log on up to 80 characters Further SMB options Input of further options for the Windows network Automatic Automount YES or NO Here you specify connection whether the network will be automatically mounted when the control starts up Devices not automatically mounted can be mounted anytime later in the program management You do not need to indicate the protocol with the ITNC 530 It uses the transmission protocol according to REC sel HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 9 Ethernet Interface i il Settings on a PC with Windows 2000 Internet Protocol
127. X 0 Y 0 31 END PGM EX11 MM bo i 80 000 60 000 40 000 dal 1 La van occ REED WINDOW 1 1 1 1 K sz ween DETAIL 18 FLT 19 FCT X 15 5 Y 0 DR R15 5 CCX 0 CY O 0 000 Reduce the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to reduce the detail Enlarge the frame overlay press and hold the soft key to magnity the detail Confirm the selected area with the WINDOW DETAIL DETAIL soft key With the WINDOW BLK FORM soft key you can restore the original section 86 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il 4 6 Adding Comments Function You can add comments to a part program to explain program steps or make general notes Adding a comment line Select the block after which the comment is to be inserted Select the SPECIAL TNC FUNCTIONS soft key Select the COMMENT soft key Enter your comment using the screen keyboard GOTO key or a USB keyboard If available and conclude the block by pressing the END key Functions for editing of the comment Jump to beginning of comment BEGIN le Jump to end of comment END gt Jump to the beginning of a word Words must be nove separated by a space lt Jump to the end of a word Words must be nove separated by a space Switch between insert mode and overwrite mo d e OVERURITE il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Program run full sequence Programming Comment BEGIN PGM EX11 MM BLK FORM 0 1
128. ach program block individually cla Halt program test soft key only appears once you have started the program test You can interrupt the program test and continue it again at any point even within a machining cycle In order to continue the test the following actions must not be performed Selecting another block with the GOTO key Making changes to the program Switching the operating mode Selecting a new program 386 11 Test Run and Program Run il 11 5 Program Run E Function In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC Program run full sequence _ mecnine par executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program ELO O stop BLK FORN 83212 X10 130 2028 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 2 T In the Program Run Single Block mode of operation you must start 2419 RO FAAR ma m each block separately by pressing the machine START button EVCL DEF 4 9 PECKING LO The following TNC functions can be used in the program run modes of Ae ee eee re operation Interrupt program run Start program run from a certain block Optional block skip Editing the tool table TOOL T 2 ee Check and change O parameters sae e E TN Superimpose handwheel positioning MN STARTUP Esk His Functions for graphic simulation Additional status display 0 000 Z E O mm m P pazi YN Em Run a part program Preparation 1 Clamp the workpiece to the machine table 2 Setth
129. active inactive 1 0 in a Program Run operating mode Tilted working plane active inactive 1 0 in a Manual operating mode X axis Y axis Z axis A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis Negative software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add j il Funct 10 8 Add IONS Imiona Positive software limit switch in axes 1 to 9 1 Software limit switch on or off O on 1 off X axis Nominal position in the REF system 240 BR O dl Y axis Z axis A axis B axis O C axis U axis Current position in the active coordinate system 270 1 V axis W axis X axis Y axis Z axis 50 Oo oO BY Ww A axis B axis C axis U axis V axis W axis TS triggering touch probe 350 51 D2 53 Touch probe type line in the touch probe table Effective length Radius of ring gauge Rounding radius Center misalignment in ref axis Center misalignment in minor axis 336 10 Programming O Parameters il Reference point from touch probe cycle 360 Value from the active datum table in the active coordinate system 500 Read data of the current tool 950 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 54 D5 56 57 10 Line 1 AJIO Column Direction of center misalignment with respect to spindle 0 Center misalignment in minor axis Rapid traverse Probe feed rate Maximum measuring range Set up clearance
130. al for your machine tool HEIDENHAIN Manual operation File management Pocket calculator MOD function HELP function Programming modes Machine operating modes Initiation of programming dialog Arrow keys and GOTO jump command Numerical input and axis selection Navigation keys A Machine panel buttons e g NC START or NC STOP are 30 1 Introduction il 1 3 Modes of Operation Manual operation and electronic handwheel The Manual Operation mode is required for setting up the machine Manual operation o tool In this operating mode you can position the machine axes manually or by increments and set the datums The Electronic Handwheel mode of operation allows you to move the REF NOML 0 000 machine axes manually with the HR electronic handwheel A a z 0 000 Soft keys for selecting the screen layout select as described previously Z Datum 1 PRESET1 Positions NOML 1 T 2075 POSITION F mm min Our 100 Left positions Right status display NE 1 3 Modes of Operation Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI Positioning with manl data input _ fecnine per BEGIN PGM MDI MM Programs This mode of operation is used for programming simple traversing 1 TOOL CALL 3 Z 51500 apps oo 2 L X 100 RO FMAX movements such as for face milling or pre positioning 4 END PGM MDI MM Soft keys for sele
131. align workpieces Quickly and precisely set datums Measure the workpiece during program run TS 220 TS 440 and TS 640 touch trigger probes These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic workpiece alignment datum setting and workpiece measurement The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the TNC via cable and may be a more economical alternative The TS 440 and TS 640 see figures at right feature infrared transmission of the triggering signal to the TNC This makes them highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers Principle of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This signal is transmitted to the TNC which stores the current position of the stylus as an actual value HR electronic handwheels Electronic handwheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per handwheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral handwheels HEIDENHAIN also offers the HR 410 portable handwheel HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 37 HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic rr tuo 1 5 Accessories 2 1 Switch On OR 2 1 Switch On Switch Off Switch on Y Switeh on and traversing the reference points can vary depending on the machine tool Refer to your machine manual Switch on the power supply for control and machine The T
132. am Expanded file management Create multiple directories and subdirectories Context sensitive help Help function for error messages Pocket calculator Entry of text and special characters On the TNC 320 via on screen keyboard on the INC 530 via regular keyboard Comment blocks in NC program Structure blocks in NC program 454 gt lt X XI X X X X X X X XI XI XI XI XI X X X X X gt lt Comparison Cycles KB O Pecking Tapping Slot milling Pocket milling 5 Circular pocket 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2i 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 HE Rough out SL Datum shift Mirror image Dwell time Rotation scaling Program call Oriented spindle stop Contour definition Pilot drilling SL I Contour milling SL Tapping controlled spindle Thread cutting Working plane Contour data Pilot drilling Rough out Floor finishing Side finishing Contour train Axis specific scaling factor Contour train Cylinder surface IDENHAIN TNC 320 X KX XIXI X XI XIXI XIXI XIXI X gt lt XI XI XJI K X X XI XI XIXI XI XI X XI XI XI X X X X XJ X X XI XI XIXI XIXI XIXI XI X X XI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X o il 29 Cylinder surface ridge 30 3 D data 32 Tolerance 39 Cylinder surface external contour 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208
133. amping devices can occur HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 m X D 3 2 o O e z A 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling j il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Mons and Thread Milling BORING Cycle 202 186 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool drills to the programmed depth at the feed rate for plunging If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting Tree The TNC then orients the spindle to the position that is defined in parameter Q336 If retraction is selected the tool retracts in the programmed direction by 0 2 mm fixed value The TNC moves the tool at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance and then if entered to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX If 0214 0 the tool point remains on the wall of the hole Q203 8 Programming Cycles il 202 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool during boring in mm min gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in m
134. ance height 0301 Definition of how the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the set up clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd set up clearance between machining operations gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 0365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between machining operations 0 Move between operations on a straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Point Patterns ining ach m x 3 D Z O z O O o jam YN O gt O Y 00 o il 2 LINEAR PATTERN Cycle 221 Som E gt Before programming note the following A Cycle 221 is DEF active which means that Cycle 221 calls the last defined fixed cycle automatically If you combine Cycle 221 with one of the fixed cycles 200 O to 209 212 to 215 265 to 267 the set up clearance A workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance that you 5 defined in Cycle 221 will be effective for the selected fixed E cycle 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current position to t the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence Move to 2nd set up clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The toolthen approaches the starting p
135. and a node depends on the quality grade of the cable the sheathing and the type of network 100BaseTX or 10BaseT No great effort is required to connect the TNC directly to a PC that has an Ethernet card Simply connect the TNC port X26 and the PC with an Ethernet crossover cable trade names crossed patch cable or STP cable HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10Basel 100Baselx 12 9 Ethernet Interface o il Connecting the control to the network Function overview of network configuration NON Programming In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network Soft key Mount Auto Mount point Mount device HOME N Nde 1PC5312 Wwork P N gt 1 2 7v PC de 1PC5323 transfer versions Make a connection to the selected network drive me Successful connection is indicated by a check mark under Mount Separates the connection to a network drive UNMOUNT DEVICE Activates or deactivates the Automount function AUTO 12 9 Ethernet Interface automatic connection of the network drive during MOUNT E control startup The status of the function is indicated A a A e by a check mark under Auto in the network drive table pevice pevrce orason uence a eat With the ping function you can check whether a connection is available to a certain participant The address is entered as four decimal numbers separated by periods dotted decimal nota
136. and returns to the starting point in the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling 11 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or If programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 208 8 Programming Cycles il 263 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Countersinking depth Q356 incremental value Distance between tool point and the top surface of the workpiece Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with MOS 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tio and workpiece surface Set up clearance to the side 0357 incremental value Distance between tool tooth and the wall Depth at front 0358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Countersinking offset at front 0359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves
137. andwheel is equipped with two permissive buttons The permissive buttons are located below the star grip You can only move the machine axes when a permissive button is depressed machine dependent function The HR 410 handwheel features the following operating elements EMERGENCY OFF button Handwheel Permissive buttons Axis address keys Actual position capture key Keys for defining the feed rate slow medium fast the feed rates are set by the machine tool builder 7 Direction in which the TNC moves the selected axis 8 Machine function set by the machine tool builder on h WN The red indicator lights show the axis and feed rate you have selected It is also possible to move the machine axes with the handwheel during a program run if M118 is active Procedure A Select the Electronic Handwheel operating mode Press and hold a permissive button j Select the axis x Select the feed rate sl Move the active axis in the positive or negative direction oS 2 Manual Operation and Setup il 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M Function In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel operating modes you can enter the spindle speed S feed rate F and the miscellaneous functions M with soft keys The miscellaneous functions are described in Chapter 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions i The machine tool builder determines which miscellaneous fun
138. ane Bytes Status Date 521 E Press the GOTO key if you want to enter a text for example a SS 11 12 205 08 50 50 program name or directory name using the screen keypad cu Hoo eS The TNC opens a window in which the numeric entry field 1 of the versions NS a a a fee 2008 12 51 TNC is displayed with the corresponding letters assigned e i2 Zoos 50 85 38 o You can move the cursor to the desired character by repeatedly Hoe 05 208 13 37 36 A PQRS TUV WXYZ 01 2006 10 48 30 pressing the respective key aa L0s 2008 12 52 12 Wait until the selected character is transferred to the entry field a eos 10 114 before you enter the next character Use the OK soft key to load the text into the open dialog field 11 2005 13 49 41 Use the abc ABC soft key to select upper or lower case If your machine tool builder has defined additional special characters you can call them with the SPECIAL CHARACTER soft key and insert them To delete individual characters use the Backspace soft key Data backup We recommend saving newly written programs and files on a PC at regular intervals 4 2 File Management HEIDENHAIN provides a backup function for this purpose in the data transfer software TNCremoNT Your machine tool builder can provide you with a copy of TNCBACK EXE You additionally need a data medium on which all machine specific data such as the PLC program machine parameters etc are stored Please contact your machine tool bui
139. angentially to the contour The auxiliary point Py is separated from the first contour point Pa by the distance LEN Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the alae with the APPR DEP key and APPR LT soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pa B gt LEN Distance from the auxiliary point Py to the first contour point Pa gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks Approaching on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour point APPR LN The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa on a straight line perpendicular to the first contour element The auxiliary point Py is separated by the distance LEN plus the tool radius from the first contour point Pa Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps gt Initiate the eaog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LN soft key gt Coordinates of the first contour point Pa P gt Length Distance to the auxiliary point Py Always enter LEN as a positive value gt Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR distance Py to Pa LEN 15 End point of the first contour element Next contour element Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR End point of the fi
140. arameter function ASSIGN press the FNO X Y soft key 5 Enter the number of the O parameter e g 5 10 ENT gt ep cL O gt 49 lt D C 49 Oo O O Ol Call the O parameter functions by pressing the O key To select the mathematical functions press the pena BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the O parameter function MULTIPLICATION press the FNS X Y soft key 12 Enter the number of the O parameter e g 12 e al mi D O Ol h O N cot 2 a h 09 lt a C D m D s N h O s 2 D 0 D Q O Q lt eb Cc D 2 18 Call the O parameter functions by pressing the O key CAT FN3 Q12 405 4700 Example Program blocks in the TNC 10 Programming O Parameters il 10 4 Trigonometric Functions Definitions Sine cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of sides of right triangles In this case Sine sna a cC Cosine cos G b c Tangent tana a b sina cosa where c is the side opposite the right angle a is the side opposite the angle a b is the third side The TNC can find the angle from the tangent o arc tan a b arc tan sin cos q Example a 25 mm b 50 mm arctan a b arctan 0 5 26 57 Furthermore a2 b c where a2 a x a c J a2 b HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 4 Trigonometric Functio
141. arks and will also move the corner If the programmed contour contains undercut features the tool may damage the contour Behavior with M120 The TNC checks radius compensated paths for contour undercuts and tool path intersections and calculates the tool path in advance from the current block Areas of the contour that might be damaged by the tool are not machined dark areas in figure at right You can also use M120 to calculate the radius compensation for digitized data or data created on an external programming system This means that deviations from the theoretical tool radius can be compensated Use LA Look Ahead behind M120 to define the number of blocks maximum 99 that you want the TNC to calculate in advance Note that the larger the number of blocks you choose the higher the block processing time will be Input If you enter M120 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the number of blocks LA that are to be calculated in advance Effect M120 must be located in an NC block that also contains radius compensation RL or RR M120 is then effective from this block until radius compensation is canceled or M120 LAO is programmed or M120 is programmed without LA or another program is called with PGM CALL or M120 becomes effective at the start of block Limitations After an external or internal stop you can only re enter the contour with the function RESTORE POS AT N Whe
142. as automatic tool changing capability the program run is not interrupted When the TNC reaches a TOOL CALL it replaces the inserted tool by another from the tool magazine HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 E 5 2 Tool Data o il m 5 2 Tool Data Automatic tool change if the tool life expires M101 The TNC automatically changes the tool if the tool life TIME2 expires during program run To use this miscellaneous function activate M101 at the beginning of the program M101 is reset with M102 The tool is changed automatically after the next NC block after expiration of the tool life or E at latest one minute after tool life expires calculation is for a potentiometer setting of 100 Prerequisites for standard NC blocks with radius compensation RO RR RL The radius of the replacement tool must be the same as that of the original tool If the radii are not equal the TNC displays an error message and does not replace the tool 108 5 Programming Tools il 5 3 Tool Compensation Introduction The TNC adjusts the spindle path in the tool axis by the compensation value for the tool length In the working plane it compensates the tool radius If you are writing the part program directly on the TNC the tool radius compensation is effective only in the working plane The TNC accounts for the compensation value in up to five axes including the rotary axes Tool length compensation Length compensation becomes effective
143. ation The radius compensation must be in the block in which you move to the first contour element You cannot begin radius compensation in a circle block It must be activated beforehand in a straight line block see Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates page 125 or approach block APPR block see Contour Approach and Departure page 119 Pre positioning Before running a part program always pre position the tool to prevent the possibility of damaging It or the workpiece Y c S pur O e LL me A tj Creating the program blocks with the path function keys The gray path function keys initiate the plain language dialog The TNC Programming Miscellaneous function M asks you successively for all the necessary information and inserts the program block into the part program 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z xs V z 20 E Example programming a straight line IS CREEN nT a Initiate the programming dialog e g for a straight line O C LL y n 10 Enter the coordinates of the straight line end point M94 n114 n118 n120 n128 nao ENT Select the radius compensation here press the RO soft key the tool moves without compensation Enter the feed rate here 100 mm min and confirm your entry with ENT For programming in inches enter 100 for a feed rate of 10 ipm Move at rapid traverse press the FMAX soft key To traverse with the feed rate defined in the TOOL CALL block pres
144. aud depending on file type and network load 2 x USB 1 1 Operation 0 C to 45 C 32 F to 113 F Storage 30 C to 70 C 22 F to 158 F 14 Tables and Overviews il Electronic handwheels Touch Probes HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 One HR 410 portable handwheel or One HR 130 panel mounted handwheel or E Up to three HR 150 panel mounted handwheels via HRA 110 handwheel adapter TS 220 3 D touch trigger probe with cable connection or TS 440 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission TS 640 3 D touch trigger probe with infrared transmission 14 2 Technical Information o il 14 2 Technical Information Positions coordinates circle radii chamfer lengths Tool numbers Tool names Delta values for tool compensation Spindle speeds Feed rates Dwell time in Cycle 9 Thread pitch in various cycles Angle of spindle orientation Angle for polar coordinates rotation tilting the working plane Polar coordinate angle for helical interpolation CP Datum numbers in Cycle 7 Scaling factor in Cycles 11 and 26 Miscellaneous Functions M Q parameter numbers Q parameter values Labels LBL for program jumps Labels LBL for program jumps Number of program section repeats REP Error number with O parameter function FN14 Spline parameter K Exponent for spline parameter Surface normal vectors N and T with 3 D compensation 442 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 places before
145. automatically as soon as a tool is called and the tool axis moves To cancel length compensation call a tool with the length L 0 CALL 0 the distance between tool and workpiece will be att If you cancel a positive length compensation with TOOL reduced After TOOL CALL the path of the tool in the tool axis as entered in the part program is adjusted by the difference between the length of the previous tool and that of the new one For tool length compensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value L Dlroo caLL DETAR where L is the tool length L from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DL TOOL CALL is the oversize for length DL in the TOOL CALL block not taken into account by the position display DL 7AB is the oversize for length DL in the tool table HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 5 3 peneana o il 5 3 Mi ompensation Tool radius compensation The NC block for programming a tool movement contains RL or RR for radius compensation RO if there is no radius compensation Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is moved with a straight line block in the working plane with RL or RR att The TNC automatically cancels radius compensation If yOu program a Straight line block with RO depart the contour with the DEP function program a PGM CALL select a new program with PGM MGT For tool radius comp
146. axis 0234 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the reference axis of the working plane gt Ath point in 2nd axis 0235 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the minor axis of the working plane gt 4th point in 3rd axis 0236 absolute value Coordinate of point 4 in the tool axis gt Number of cuts 0240 Number of passes to be made between points 1 and 4 2 and 3 gt Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling The TNC performs the first step at half the programmed feed rate 8 Programming Cycles il FACE MILLING Cycle 232 Cycle 232 is used to face mill a level surface in multiple infeeds while taking the finishing allowance into account Three machining strategies are available 2 Strategy O389 0 Meander machining stepover outside the surface being machined Strategy 0389 1 Meander machining stepover within the surface being machined Strategy 0389 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate From the current position the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position using positioning logic 1 If the current position in the spindle axis is greater than the 2nd set up clearance the control positions the tool first in the machining plane and then in the spindle axis Otherwise it first moves to the 2nd set up clearance and then In the machining plane The starting poi
147. ay the soft key MANUAL OPERATION If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active tool axis 200 Q203 8 Programming Cycles il TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 The tool machines the thread in several passes until it reaches the programmed depth You can define in a parameter whether the tool is to be retracted completely from the hole for chip breaking 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface There it carries out an oriented spindle stop The tool moves to the programmed infeed depth reverses the direction of spindle rotation and retracts by a specific distance or completely for chip release depending on the definition It then reverses the direction of spindle rotation again and advances to the next infeed depth The TNC repeats this process 2 to 3 until the programmed thread depth is reached The tool is then retracted to the set up clearance If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX The TNC stops the spindle turning at set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling papers and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling 209 RT Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance Z2 between tool tip at starting positio
148. b a c 10 Programming O Parameters il Programming example Calculate an angle with the arc tangent from the opposite side 012 and adjacent side 013 then store in Q25 Q To select the formula entering function press the Q key and FORMULA soft key 25 Enter the parameter number 13 Shift the soft key row and select the arc tangent function EN Shift the soft key row and open the parentheses 19 Enter O parameter number 12 Select division Enter O parameter number 13 13 gt E Close parentheses and conclude formula entry Example NC block HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 e Entering Formulas Directly il o Preassigned O Parameters 10 11 Preassigned O Parameters The Q parameters 0100 to 0122 are assigned values by the TNC These values include Values from the PLC Tool and spindle data Data on operating status etc Values from the PLC Q100 to 0107 The TNC uses the parameters 0100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Active tool radius 0108 The active value of the tool radius is assigned to 0108 0108 is calculated from Tool radius R Tool table or TOOL DEF block Delta value DR from the tool table Delta value DR from the TOOL CALL block Tool axis 0109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis No tool axis defined 0109 1 X axis Q109 0 Y axis Q109 1 Z axis Q109 2 U axis Q109 6 V axis 9109 7 W axis Q109 8 3
149. basic rotation later write down the value that appears under Rotation angle Make a basic rotation with the side of the workpiece see Compensating Workpiece Misalignment on page 420 Probe the second side as for a basic rotation but do not set the rotation angle to zero Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle PA between the two sides as the rotation angle Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously Workp O 13 5 Meas HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 427 il 13 6 Touch Probe Data Management 13 6 Touch Probe Data Management Introduction Manual operation Programming To make It possible to cover the widest possible range of applications TOUCH PROBE TS Tool number the touch probe management enable offers several settings to enable Infrared cable probe Spindle orientation you to determine the behavior common to all touch probe cycles The o CBG Ie Probe length L TNC always uses the values from the touch probe management even ue eee rey eee it values are also entered in the tool table Press the PARAMETER soft center ortset 2 muz key to open the touch probe management window a per Ae Feed for probing F1 Safety clearance Sr Max meas path Mu Tool number Number by which the touch probe is registered in the tool table 0 000 2 24 123 Infrared cable probe 0 Touch probe
150. between the TNC and TNCremoNT TNCremoNT THT Datei Ansicht Extras Hilfe Check whether the TNC is connected to the correct serial port on your la e ajx ol Ja PC or to the network respectively m Steuerung TNC 400 Once you have started TNCremoNT you will see a list of all files that ee a ener Fe a aa poles are stored in the active directory in the upper section of the main ae 4 E oi a Insgesamt E window 1 Using the menu items lt File gt and lt Change directory gt you ira eae oO can change the active directory or select another directory on your PC ESI 384 02 09 97 14 51 30 zi m Verbindung If you want to control data transfer from the PC establish the Name ote Atribute Datum Protokol connection with your PC in the following manner 20H 1596 06 04 99 15 39 42 rarer 201 H 1004 06 04 99 15 39 44 Com Select lt File gt lt Setup connection gt TNCremoNT now receives the Dam 2 SRE aiea file and directory structure from the TNC and displays this at the E a z a a bottom left of the main window 2 02124 3352 06 04 39 15 39 40 sl To transfer a file from the TNC to the PC select the file in the TNC PEA Z window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the PC window 1 To transfer a file from the PC to the TNC select the file in the PC window with a mouse click and drag and drop the highlighted file into the TNC window 2 If you want to con
151. bsolute value Angle by which the entire pattern is rotated The center of rotation lies in the starting point Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Moving to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the set up clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd set up clearance between the measuring points HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Point Patterns ining ach m x D 3 2 D Z O z O O jam YN O gt O Y 00 o il Point Patterns ining O 8 4 Cycles f N 52 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling 8 Programming Cycles il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define cycle for circular pattern 1 CYCL 200 is called automatically 0200 0203 and 0204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 Point Patterns ining io O Define cycle for circular pattern 2 CYCL 200 is called automatically 0200 0203 and 0204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 8 4 Cycles f Retract in the tool axis end
152. by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Position the ball tip at a starting position near the first touch point Select the probe direction perpendicular to the angle reference axis Select the axis by soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Position the ball tip at a starting position near the second touch point To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The TNC determines the basic rotation and displays the angle after the dialog Rotation angle 420 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il Displaying a basic rotation The angle of the basic rotation appears after ROTATION ANGLE whenever PROBING ROT is selected The TNC also displays the rotation angle in the additional status display STATUS POS In the status display a symbol is shown for a basic rotation whenever the TNC is moving the axes according to a basic rotation To cancel a basic rotation Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Enter a rotation angle of zero and confirm with the ENT key Terminate the probe function by pressing the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Manual operation asic rotation Rotation angle jo 225 Angle of probed surface o 1st measuring point in 3r a 1st measuring point in 3r fa 1st measuring point in 3r fo 1st measuring point in 3r a T 4 Our 100 M Ey aa TLA 123 EE E END Y Compensating Wo
153. can also generate a straight line block L block by using the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key gt In the Manual Operation mode move the tool to the position you wish to capture Switch the screen display to Programming and Editing gt Select the program block after which you want to insert the L block Press the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key The TNC generates an L block with the actual position coordinates Inserting a Chamfer CHF between Two Straight Lines The chamfer enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two straight lines The blocks before and after the CHF block must be in the same working plane E The radius compensation before and after the chamfer block must be the same An inside chamfer must be large enough to accommodate the current tool CHF Chamfer side length Length of the chamfer 69 Further entries if necessary gt Feed rate F only effective in CHF block Example NC blocks CS You cannot start a contour with a CHF block A chamfer is possible only in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the chamfer and is not part of the contour A teed rate programmed in the CHF block is effective only in that block After the CHF block the previous feed rate becomes effective again 126 6 Programming Programming Contours il Corner Rounding RND The RND function is used for rounding off corners The tool moves on an arc that is tangen
154. cannot change the table entries You should always lock the selected rows when you are going to make changes SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE 3 Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Transfer one row of the result set into the Q parameters of your NC program SQL FETCH Prepare changes in the O parameters and transfer one row from the result set SQL UPDATE Prepare new table row in the O parameters and transfer into the result set as a new row SQL INSERT Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the data from the result set Is placed in the table file The data is now saved in the file Any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL COMMIT f table entries were not changed or inserted only read access any locks are canceled and the result set is released SQL ROLLBACK WITHOUT INDEX A Multiple transactions can be edited at the same time You must conclude a transaction even if it consists solely of read accesses Only this guarantees that changes insertions are not lost that locks are canceled and that result sets are released 346 SOL Select Result SQL Fetch 1234 gt set SOE Commit SOL Update A 4 SOL Rollback SOL Insert 2 a File SQL server NC program management 10 Programming O Parameters Result set The selected rows are numbered in ascending order within the result set starti
155. center cut end mill ISO 1641 270 8 Programming Cycles il 231 Starting point in lst axis 0225 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Starting point in 2nd axis 0226 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Starting point in 3rd axis 0227 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the tool axis 2nd point in 1st axis 0228 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane 2nd point in 2nd axis 0229 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane 2nd point in 3rd axis 0230 absolute value Stopping point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the tool axis 3rd point in 1st axis 0231 absolute value Coordinate of point 3 in the reference axis of the working plane 3rd point in 2nd axis 0232 absolute value Coordinate of point 3 in the minor axis of the working plane 3rd point in 3rd axis 0233 absolute value Coordinate of point 3 in the tool axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Q228 Q231 Q234 Q225 8 6 w for Multipass Milling o il 8 6 M for Multipass Milling 2 272 gt Ath point in 1st
156. chine START button Probe both workpiece sides twice To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Datum Enter both datum coordinates into the menu window and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key To terminate the probe function press the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Se B MUS the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe il ocio the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe Circle center as datum With this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes circular pockets cylinders studs circular islands etc Inside circle The TNC automatically probes the inside wall in all four coordinate axis directions For incomplete circles circular arcs you can choose the appropriate probing direction Position the touch probe approximately in the center of the circle PROBING Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING CC soft key To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The touch probe touches four points on the inside of the circle If you are probing to find the stylus center only possible on machines with spindle orientation press the 180 soft key and probe another four points on the inside of the circle If you are not probing to find the stylus center press the END key Datum In the menu window enter both datum coordinates and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key To terminate the probe function press the END key
157. cket table RESET POCKET TABLE Reset tool number column T RESET COLUMN T Go to beginning of the line BEGIN LINE Go to end of the line END LINE gt Simulate a tool change SIMULATED TOOL CHANGE Activate a filter aaa FILTER Select a tool from the tool table SELECT Edit the current field EDIT CURRENT FIELD Sort the view SORT HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 105 E 5 2 Tool Data m 5 2 Tool Data Calling tool data A TOOL CALL block in the part program is defined with the following data Select the tool call function with the TOOL CALL key vere Tool number Enter the number or name of the tool The tool must already be defined in a TOOL DEF block or in the tool table The TNC automatically places the tool name in quotation marks The tool name always refers to the entry in the active tool table TOOL T If you wish to call a tool with other compensation values also enter the index you defined in the tool table after the decimal point Working spindle axis X Y Z Enter the tool axis Spindle speed S Spindle speed in rom Feed rate F F is effective until you program a new feed rate in a positioning or TOOL CALL block Tool length oversize DL Enter the delta value for the tool length Tool radius oversize DR Enter the delta value for the tool radius Tool radius oversize DR2 Enter the delta value for the tool radius 2 Example Tool call Call tool number 5 in the tool axis Z with a spindle speed of 2500
158. cks that are programmed before the current block Change the position of the current block on EN the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blocks that are programmed after the current block Move from one block to the next Select individual words in a block D G To selecta certain block press the GOTO key enter the desired block number and confirm with the ENT key 00 80 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Set the selected word to zero 2 m 1886 uS E Erase an incorrect number Clear a non blinking error message Delete the selected word mz 46e Delete the selected block g m P O Erase cycles and program sections DEL Insert the block that was last edited or deleted NC BLOCK Inserting blocks at any desired location Select the block after which you want to insert a new block and initiate the dialog Editing and inserting words Select a word in a block and overwrite It with the new one The plain language dialog is available while the word is highlighted To accept the change press the END key If you want to insert a word press the horizontal arrow key repeatedly until the desired dialog appears You can then enter the desired value Looking for the same words in different blocks For this function set the AUTO DRAW soft key to OFF To select a word in a block press the arrow keys repeatedly until the highlight is on th
159. contain unconventional coordinate data that cannot be entered with the gray path function keys You may for example have only the following data on a specific contour element Known coordinates on the contour element or in Its proximity Coordinate data that are referenced to another contour element Directional data and data regarding the course of the contour You can enter such dimensional data directly by using the FK free contour programming function The TNC derives the contour from the known coordinate data and supports the programming dialog with the interactive programming graphics The figure to the upper right shows a workpiece drawing for which FK programming is the most convenient programming method CEP The following prerequisites for FK programming must be observed The FK free contour programming feature can only be used for programming contour elements that lie in the working plane The working plane is defined in the first BLK FORM block of the part program You must enter all available data for every contour element Even the data that does not change must be entered in every block otherwise It will not be recognized O parameters are permissible in all FK elements except in elements with relative references e g RX or RAN or in elements that are referenced to other NC blocks If both FK blocks and conventional blocks are entered in a program the FK contour must be fully defined before you can retu
160. conversational L_POLISH Display text only in Polish conversational L_HUNGARIA Display text only in Hungarian conversational L_ALL Display the text independent of the conversational language HOUR Number of hours from the real time clock HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add MIN Number of minutes from the real time clock SEC Number of seconds from the real time clock DAY Day from the real time clock MONTH Month as a number from the real time clock STR_MONTH Month as a string abbreviation from the real time clock YEAR2 Two digit year from the real time clock YEAR4 Four digit year from the real time clock In the part program program FN 16 F PRINT to activate the output The TNC then outputs the file PROT1 TXT through the serial interface CALIBRAT CHART IMPELLER CENTER GRAVITY DATE 27 11 2001 TIME 8 56 34 NO OF MEASURED VALUES 1 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk X1 149 360 Y1 25 509 Z1 37 000 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk GF If you use FN 16 several times in the program the TNC saves all texts in the file that you have defined with the first FN 16 function The file is not output until the TNC reads the END PGM block or you press the NC stop button or you close the file with M_CLOSE In the FN16 block program the format file and the log file with their respective extensions If you enter only the file nam
161. cremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement If the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Decrement 0212 incremental value Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 Minimum plunging depth 0205 incremental value If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Upper advanced stop distance 0258 incremental value Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the first plunging depth Lower advanced stop distance Q259 incremental value Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the last plunging depth If you enter Q258 not equal to 0259 the TNC will change the a
162. croprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated machining tasks or if large areas are being machined Example Multipass milling over the entire blank form with a large tool The TNC interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics window The machining process is continued however Plan view This is the fastest of the three graphic display modes ra Press the soft key for plan view Regarding depth display remember The deeper the surface the darker the shade HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 377 il 11 1 Graphics Projection in 3 planes Similar to a workpiece drawing the part is displayed with a plan view and two sectional planes Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification see Magnifying details page 380 In addition you can shift the sectional planes with the corresponding soft keys 0 ll Select the soft key for projection in three planes Shift the soft key row and select the soft key for sectional planes The TNC then displays the following soft keys Shift the vertical sectional plane to the right coo o Shift the vertical sectional plane forward or or left backward or downwards Shift the horizontal sectional plane upwards ma The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting The default setting of the sectional plane is selected so that It lies in the working plane and in the tool
163. ct the position display in the status display With Position display 2 you can select the position display in the additional status display HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 lay Types Isp D ITION 12 5 Pos o il 12 6 Unit of Measurement 12 6 Unit of Measurement Function This MOD function determines whether the coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches To select the metric system e g X 15 789 mm set the Change mm inches function to mm The value is displayed to 3 decimal places To select the inch system e g X 0 6216 inches set the Change mm inches function to inches The value is displayed to 4 decimal places If you would like to activate the inch display the TNC shows the feed rate in inch min In an inch program you must enter the feed rate larger by a factor of 10 402 12 MOD Functions il 12 7 Display Operating Times Function Manual operation Programming gt The machine tool builder can provide further operating time displays The machine tool manual provides further information CEI The MACHINE TIME soft key enables you to see various types of Y eee sae py Program run ad Oar operating times ds DS PLC mere riba cae PLC Betriebszeit PLC Betriebszeit PLC Betriebszeit PLC Betriebszeit 0 00 00 Control ON Operating time of the control since put into O Service CANCEL Machine ON Operating time of the machine tool since put into
164. cting the screen layout bg 20 00 00 DS O 00 00 00 0 000 Y 24 123 Left program blocks Right status display PROGRAM STATUS mm7min Our 100 F T Programming and editing dis EE ree as a ee ee In this mode of operation you can write your part programs The FK free programming feature the various cycles and the O parameter Positioning Programming functions help you with programming and add necessary information HEBEL H If desired you can have the programming graphics show the individual TOOL CALL 2 z sasao Fso oo steps L X 30 Y 0 RO FMAX L 2 5 RO FMAX M3 APPR LCT X 10 Y 0 RS RL FPOL X 100 Y 0 FC DR R1 CLSD CCX Soft keys for selecting the screen layout R15 CCX 1 0 CCY 0 LT 13 FCT DR R10 CCPR 4 _ CCPA 118 14 FLT PDX 100 PDY 0 D15 15 FSELECT1 16 FCT DR RS 17 FLT PDX 1 PDY D15 P m 18 FCT DR R10 CLSD CCX CCY rog ra 19 FSELECT1 PGM 20 DEP LCT X 30 Y 0 Z 100 RS FMAX 21 END PGM HEBEL MM 100 000 Left program right programming graphics ka HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 31 1 3 Modes of Operatior Test Run In the Test Run mode of operation the TNC checks programs and program sections for errors such as geometrical incompatibilities missing or incorrect data within the program or violations of the work space This simulation is supported graphically in different display modes Soft keys for s
165. ctions M are available on your control and what effects they have Entering values Spindle speed S miscellaneous function M EN To enter the spindle speed press the S soft key 1000 Enter the desired spindle speed and confirm your entry with the machine START button The spindle speed S with the entered rom is started with a miscellaneous function M Proceed in the same way to enter a miscellaneous function M Feed rate F After entering a feed rate F you must confirm your entry with the OK key instead of the machine START button The following is valid for feed rate F If you enter F 0 then the lowest feed rate from the machine parameter minFeed is effective If the feed rate entered exceeds the value defined in the machine parameter maxFeed then the parameter value is effective F Is not lost during a power interruption HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 2 3 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous puncte M 2 3 Spindle Speed Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous 1 M Changing the spindle speed and feed rate With the override knobs you can vary the spindle speed S and feed rate F from 0 to 150 of the set value However the range can be further limited by the machine parameters minFeedOverride maxFeedOverride minSpindleOverride and maxSpindleOverride are set by the machine tool builder u The override dial for spindle speed is only functional on L g PROBE machines with infinitely variable spindle drive as
166. d in the actual coordinate system ACT or with respect to the machine coordinate system REF To conclude the input press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example NC blocks E 13 7 Automatic Workpiece Measurement il DOKU_BOHRPL A MOVE D 25852 H REIECK H EISI H ElS31xY H DEL H ORAT H 10 I WAHL PNT Jatei Cen 3716000 kbyte frei 76 76 416 90 22 16 Tables and Overviews 14 1 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices s The interface complies with the requirements of EN 50 178 for low voltage electrical separation When using the 25 pin adapter block Do not assign RXD gt lt U Green DT Signal GND DSR RT EMI ea LOMAS COM GUSANO COIN E CI C GS E a JJ UU O 2 5 O 0 NI OD O1 AJ WY N gt Do not assign Hsg Ext shield Ext shield Hsg When using the 9 pin adapter block N l amp lt nd Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces Do not assign A CI e E 3 Brown 14 1 Pin Lay Black Eoo Violet o CO NI O AJ WY N gt O NI cy AIAI O NM O gt CIN ICC CAM CAM CN CAE EMM CAN CA Do not assign Hsg Ext shield LT 0 O 436 14 Tables and Overviews il Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector pin layout of a non HEIDENHAIN device may differ considerably from that on a HEIDENHAIN device This o
167. d rate for milling The end point lies within the surface The control Z calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the TS programmed length and the tool radius ara e 4 The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at ye PA the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the Y q ee ae gt programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap lt a l O factor Y 5 The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 Yj The motion to the next line occurs within the workpiece borders 6 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been 1 A completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth gt is plunged to Cp 7 In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction 8 The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate 9 Atthe end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance ycles for Multipass Milling 00 274 8 Programming Cycles il Strategy 0389 2 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius The TN
168. d spindle rom Active spindle status 1 undefined O M3 active 1 M4 active 2 Mb after M3 3 M5 after M4 Coolant status O off 1 on Active feed rate Index of the prepared tool Index of the active tool Channel number Set up clearance of active fixed cycle Drilling depth milling depth of active fixed cycle Plunging depth of active fixed cycle Feed rate for pecking in active fixed cycle ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add o il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Modal condition 35 Data for SOL tables 40 Data from the tool table 50 332 Ww Ol Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no Tool no 1st side length for rectangular pocket cycle 2nd side length for rectangular pocket cycle 1st side length for slot cycle 2nd side length for slot cycle Radius for circular pocket cycle Feed rate for milling in active fixed cycle Direction of rotation for active fixed cycle Dwell time for active fixed cycle Thread pitch for Cycles 17 18 Milling allowance for active fixed cycle Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle Direction angle for rough out in active fixed cycle Probe angle Probe path Probing feed rate Dimensioning 0 absolute G90 1 incremental G91 Result code for the last SOL command Tool length Tool radius Tool radius R2 Oversize for tool length DL Oversize for tool radius DR Oversize for tool radius
169. datum shift rotation mirroring The coordinates of the circle center that was last defined CS Note that the stored data remain active until they are reset e g If you select a new program The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION soft key Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the machine START button if the program was interrupted in one of the following ways The machine STOP button was pressed An interruption was programmed Resuming program run after an error If the error message is not blinking Remove the cause of the error To clear the error message from the screen press the CE key Restart the program or resume program run where it was interrupted If there is a processor check error Switch to Manual mode Press the OFF soft key Remove the cause of the error Start again If you cannot correct the error write down the error message and contact your repair service agency HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 11 5 Program Run o il Mid program startup block scan Program run full sequence BEGIN POM 220 PP BEGIN PGM 220 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 2 Z 51500 L 2 98 RO FMAX M3 L 2 2 RO F2222 With the RESTORE POS AT feature block scan you can start a part A On program at any block you desire The TNC
170. decimal point places after decimal point mm O to 32 767 9 5 1 16 characters enclosed by quotation marks with TOOL CALL Permitted special characters amp 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 99 999 999 5 3 rom O to 99 999 999 5 3 mm min or mm tooth or mm rev O to 3600 000 4 3 s 99 9999 to 99 9999 2 4 mm O to 360 0000 3 4 360 0000 to 360 0000 3 4 5400 0000 to 5400 0000 4 4 O to 2999 4 0 0 000001 to 99 999999 2 6 O to 999 3 0 O to 1999 4 0 99 999 9999 to 99 999 9999 5 4 O to 999 3 0 Any text string in quotes 1 to 65 534 5 0 O to 1099 4 0 9 99999999 to 9 99999999 1 8 255 to 255 3 0 9 99999999 to 9 99999999 1 8 14 Tables and Overviews il 14 3 Exchanging the Buffer Battery A buffer battery supplies the TNC with current to prevent the data in RAM memory from being lost when the TNC is switched off If the TNC displays the error message Exchange buffer battery then you must replace the batteries C Backup your data before changing the buffer battery att To exchange the buffer battery first switch off the TNC The buffer battery must be exchanged only by trained service personnel Battery type 1 Lithium battery tyoe CR 2450N Renata ID Nr 315 878 01 1 The buffer battery is on the main board of the MC 320 see 1 figure at upper right 2 Remove the five screws of the MC 320 housing cover 3 Remove
171. dimensions are shown in the BLK FORM table The TNC takes the dimensions from the workpiece blank definition of the selected program The workpiece cuboid defines the coordinate system for input lts datum lies within the traverse range cuboid You can view the position of the active datum within the traverse range by pressing the CURRENT DATUM soft key For a test run when working space monitoring is deactivated it does not matter where the workpiece blank is located within the working space However if you activate working space monitoring you must graphically shift the workpiece blank so that it lies within the working space Use the soft keys shown in the table You can also activate the current datum for the Test Run operating mode see the last line of the following table Shift workpiece blank in positive negative X direction dl Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Y direction E 4 Shift workpiece blank in positive negative Z direction il jj Show workpiece blank referenced to the set a datum PUNKT HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 j H a o H u o H o 3 Q o 1000 000 1000 000 999 000 999 000 999 000 999 000 x Y 2 x Y 2 LK FORM 0 0009 100 000 0 0009 100 000 20 000 0 000 Dona w E 11 2 Showing Workpiece in the Working Space il Bas Functions for Program Display 11 3 Functions for Program Display Overview In the Program Run modes of operation
172. dinate transformations on page 36 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Manual operation Table editing X Cmm ere O0 000000000000000000000 0 000000000000000000000 000 9 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 eS 00000000000000000000000 t 000009 000000000000000000000009 000000000000000000000009 0000000000000 000000000O 0000000000000000000000O 000000000000000000000009 P D Q E INSERT DELETE FIND LINE LINE 285 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working plane Effect The mirror image cycle becomes effective as soon as It is defined in the program lt is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional status display If you mirror only one axis the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in fixed cycles If you mirror two axes the machining direction remains the same The result of the mirror image depends on the location of the datum If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored the element simply flips over If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored the element also jumps to another location ate Transformation Cycles CS If you mirror only one axis the machining direction is reversed for the milling cycles Cycles 2xx
173. direction buttons can vary depending on the machine tool The machine tool manual provides further information To traverse with the machine axis direction buttons w Select the Manual Operation mode x Press the machine axis direction button and hold it as long as you wish the axis to move or x Move the axis continuously Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the and machine START button 0 To stop the axis press the machine STOP button You can move several axes ata time with these two methods You can change the feed rate at which the axes are traversed with the F soft key see Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M page 45 42 2 Manual Operation and Setup il Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning you can move a machine axis by a preset distance A Select the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode rNoRE Select incremental jog positioning Switch the FF on INCREMENT soft key to ON 8 corzen Enter the jog increment in mm e g 8 mm and press AME the CONFIRM VALUE soft key Finish the entry with the OK soft key oK x Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired To deactivate the function press the Switch off soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 2 2 Moving the JD 2 2 Moving the Machine A Traversing with the HR 410 electronic handwheel The portable HR 410 h
174. dvance stop distances between the first and last plunging depths at the same rate HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling m x D 3 El o O zZ e z A 194 gt Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 incremental value Depth at which the TNC carries out chip breaking There is no chip breaking if O is entered Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental value Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom gt Deepened starting point 0379 incremental with respectto the workpiece surface Starting position of drilling if a shorter tool has already pilot drilled to a certain depth The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the set up clearance to a deepened starting point in mm min Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to 0 If you use Q379 to enter a deepened starting point the TNC merely changes the starting point of the infeed movement Retraction movements are not changed by the TNC therefore they are calculated with respect to the coordinate of the workpiece surface 8 Programming Cycles i
175. e string parameter 0S10 beginning with the third character BEG3 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 12 String Parameters il 10 12 String Parameters Checking a string parameter With the INSTR function you can check whether a string parameter is contained in another string parameter In SRC_OS enter the string parameter to be searched In SEA_OS enter the string parameter to be found With the BEG function you can specify a position to begin the search As the result the TNC returns the first position of appearance If it does not find such a string parameter it returns the value 0 Example 0S10 is checked starting from the third character for whether it contains 0S13 Reading the length of a string parameter The STRLEN functions returns the length of a string parameter in the given string variable Example The length of QS15 is requested Reading the alphabetic order With the STRCOMP function you can find the alphabetic order of string parameters If the first string parameter SRC_QS is alphabetically before the second SEA_QS the TNC returns the result 1 With the reverse sequence the result is 1 If they are alphabetically equal the result Is O Example The alphabetic sequence of QS12 and QS14 is checked Reading system strings You can also read string parameters for many system variables FN 18 SYSREAD Enter the ID for the system variables plus the value 10000 Example Read the path of the NC pro
176. e STOP Coolant OFF Optional program STOP Page 162 Page 394 Stop program Spindle STOP Coolant OFF Clear status display depending on machine parameter Go to block 1 M03 MO5 M06 Spindle ON clockwise Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindle STOP Page 162 Page 162 Tool change Stop program run machine dependent function Spindle STOP Mos M09 M13 M14 Coolant ON Coolant OFF Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Page 162 Page 162 Page 162 Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON M30 M89 M91 M92 Same function as M02 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective machine dependent function Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum Page 162 Page 179 Page 163 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine M94 tool builder such as tool change position Page 163 Page 174 Reduce display of rotary axis to value under 360 M97 M98 Machine small contour steps Page 165 Machine open contours completely M99 M101 Blockwise cycle call Page 167 Page 179 Automatic tool change with replacement tool if maximum tool life has expired M102 M107 M108 M109 Cancel M101 Suppress error message for replacement tools Cancel M107 Page 108 Page 107 Constant contouring speed at tool cutting edge M110 M111 M116 increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at t
177. e coordinates X 450 Y 750 With the DATUM SHIFT cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position X 450 Y 750 to be able to program the holes 5 to 7 without further calculations 58 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il MAX MIN S A EA 325 450 900 950 4 2 File Management Fundamentals Files Programs In HEIDENHAIN format H In ISO format Tables for Tools T Tool changers TCH Datums D When you write a part program on the TNC you must first enter a file name The TNC saves the program as a file with the same name The TNC can also save texts and tables as files The TNC provides a special file management window in which you can easily find and manage your files Here you can call copy rename and erase files With the TNC you can manage and save files up to a total size of 10 MB File names When you store programs tables and texts as files the TNC adds an extension to the file name separated by a point This extension indicates the file type ProGz0 File name File type HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 2 er e 0 4 2 File Management Y Screen keypad 0 e You can enter letters and special characters with the screen keypad or Proaram run Programming if available with a PC keyboard connected over the USB port 3 U Nnc_progN320N H gt 1I e Enter the text with the screen keypad cont f File n
178. e datum 3 Select the necessary tables and pallet files status M 4 Select the part program status M gt You can adjust the feed rate and spindle speed with the override knobs It is possible to reduce the rapid traverse speed when starting the NC program using the FMAX soft key The entered value remains in effect even after the machine has been turned off and on again In order to re establish the original rapid traverse speed you need to re enter the corresponding value Program Run Full Sequence Start the part program with the machine START button Program Run Single Block Start each block of the part program individually with the machine START button HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 387 11 5 Program Run Interrupting machining There are several ways to interrupt a program run Programmed interruptions Pressing the machine STOP button If the TNC registers an error during program run It automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions You can program interruptions directly in the part program The TNC interrupts the program run at a block containing one of the following entries STOP with and without a miscellaneous function Miscellaneous function MO M2 or M30 Miscellaneous function M6 determined by the machine tool builder Interrupting the machining process with the machine STOP button Press the machine STOP button The block that the TNC is currently executing is not completed
179. e defined probing direction The probing direction must be defined in the cycle as a polar angle 2 After the TNC has saved the position the touch probe stops The TNC saves the X Y Z coordinates of the probe tip center in three successive O parameters You define the number of the first parameter in the cycle 3 Finally the TNC moves the touch probe back by that value against the probing direction that you defined in the parameter MB E Before programming note the following Enter the maximum retraction path MB to be just large enough to prevent a collision If the TNC could not determine a valid touch point the fourth result parameter will have the value 1 Parameter number for result Enter the number of the O parameter to which you want the TNC to assign the first coordinate X Probe axis Enter the reference axis of the working plane X for tool axis Z Z for tool axis Y and Y for tool axis X and confirm with ENT Probing angle Angle measured from the probing axis at which the touch probe is to move Confirm with ENT Maximum measuring path Enter the maximum distance from the starting point by which the touch probe may move Confirm with ENT Feed rate Enter the measuring feed rate in mm min Maximum retraction path Traverse path in the direction opposite the probing direction after the stylus was deflected REFERENCE SYSTEM 0 ACT 1 REF Specify whether the result of measurement is to be save
180. e desired word Select a block with the arrow keys HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 4 Creating and Wri oa Programs The word that is highlighted in the new block is the same as the one you selected previously If you have started a search in a very long program the TNC shows a progress display window You then have the option of canceling the search via soft key In the tool axis the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool tip and thus always takes the active tool length compensation into account Finding any text To select the search function press the FIND soft key The TNC displays the dialog prompt Find text Enter the text that you wish to find To find the text press the EXECUTE soft key Marking copying deleting and inserting program sections Program run Programming EX11 H The TNC provides certain functions for copying program sections within an NC program or into another NC program see the table below BEGIN PGM EX11 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 135 4 2 5 BLK FORM 2 X 30 Y 40 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z 53000 F2222 L X 3 Y 0 FMAX L Z 2 RO FMAX M13 L Z 5 F200 L X 15 5 Y 0 RL FC DR R15 5 CCX 0 CCY 0 D35 To copy a program section proceed as follows Sees poco 10 FSELECT1 1 FCT DR R6 3 ONTUBWUNeYS e 12 FCT DR R CCX 0 CCY 0 Select the soft key row containing the marking functions 1g FOT DRa Rid 00X 7e cove 14 FCT DR R89 CCX 0 CCY 4 4 Creating and Wri Programs 15 F
181. e dialog and erase the block O Actual position capture The TNC enables you to transfer the current tool position into the program for example during Positioning block programming Cycle programming Define the tools with TOOL DEF To transfer the correct position values proceed as follows Place the input box at the position in the block where you want to insert a position value Select the actual position capture function In the soft key row the TNC displays the axes whose positions can be transferred Select the axis The TNC writes the current position of the selected axis into the active input box In the working plane the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool center even though tool radius compensation Is active pe In the tool axis the TNC always captures the coordinates of the tool tip and thus always takes the active tool length compensation into account HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 4 Creating and Wri oa Programs 4 4 Creating and Wri T Programs Editing a program While you are creating or editing a part program you can select any desired line in the program or individual words in a block with the arrow keys or the soft keys Go to previous page v D Q m Go to next page Go to beginning of program oO m y H 2 Go to end of program m oO k Change the position of the current block on the screen Press this soft key to display additional program blo
182. e for the path of the log file the TNC saves the log file in the directory in which the NC program with the FN16 function is located You can output up to 32 O parameters per line in the format description file 330 10 Programming O Parameters il FN 18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data With the function FN 18 SYS DATUM READ you can read system data and store them in Q parameters You select the system data through a group number ID number and additionally through a number and an index Program information 10 System jump addresses 13 Machine status 20 Channel data 25 Cycle parameter 30 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 9 gt 103 Q parameter number Number of active fixed cycle Relevant within NC cycles for inquiry as to whether the O parameter given under IDX was explicitly stated in the associated CYCLE DEF Label jumped to during M2 M30 instead of the value that ends the current program 0 M2 M30 has the normal effect Label jumped to if FN14 ERROR after the NC CANCEL reaction instead of aborting the program with an error The error number programmed in the FN14 command can be read under ID992 NR14 Value 0 FN14 has the normal effect Label jumped to in the event of an internal server error SQL PLC CFG instead of aborting the program with an error Value 0 Server error has the normal effect Active tool number Prepared tool number Active tool axis O X 1 Y 2 Z 6 U 7 V 8 W Programme
183. e plane Pre position in tool axis to set up clearance Move to working depth Update the angle Update the counter Calculate the current X coordinate Calculate the current Y coordinate Move to next point Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift Move to set up clearance End of subprogram W 68 10 Programming Q Parameters il 10 13 Programming Examples Program sequence Program functions only with a spherical cutter The tool length refers to the sphere center The contour of the cylinder is approximated by many short line segments defined in 013 The more line segments you define the smoother the curve becomes The cylinder is milled in longitudinal cuts here parallel to the Y axis The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in space Clockwise machining direction Starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is compensated automatically HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 50 Y 100 X Z 50 100 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Center in Z axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Radius of the cylinder Length of the cylinder Rotational position in the X Y plane Allowance for cylinder radius Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Number of
184. e programmed Starting or end position Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the first or last contour point to prevent the possibility of damaging the contour Entering radius compensation Program any desired path function enter the coordinates of the target point and confirm your entry with ENT a To select tool movement to the left of the contour RL press the RL soft key or To select tool movement to the right of the contour press the RR soft key or To select tool movement without radius compensation or to cancel radius compensation press the ENT key E To terminate the block press the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 5 3 penso Radius compensation Machining corners Outside corners If you program radius compensation the TNC moves the tool around outside corners on a transitional arc If necessary the TNC reduces the feed rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress tor example at very great changes of direction Inside corners The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners under radius compensation From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour 5 3 Tolfompensation 112 5 Programming Tools il Y jad e gt 8 6
185. e ref axis direction 2 Retract tool in the neg secondary axis direction 3 Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction 4 Retract tool in the pos secondary axis direction Danger of collision Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away from the edge of the hole gt Angle for spindle orientation Q336 absolute value Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before it is plunged into or retracted from the bore hole HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 m x 3 D Z O z O O 8 2 Cycles for Drilling and Thread Milling 19 mb UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 ing 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 If you enter a deepened starting point the TNC move at the defined positioning feed rate to the set up clearance above the deepened starting point The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 4 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set up clearance and then at FMAX to the
186. e with radius compensation RL The subprograms must not contain tool axis coordinates E f you use O parameters then only perform the calculations and assignments within the affected contour subprograms 254 Example Program structure Machining with SL Cycles 8 Programming Cycles il Characteristics of the fixed cycles The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set up clearance before a cycle Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies for the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles The contour is approached on a tangential arc for side finishing For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for tool axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and set up clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 5 SL Cycles i il 8 5 SL Cycles Overview of SL Cycles 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY essential 14 Page 256 20 CONTOUR DATA essential 20 om Page 260 21 PILOT DRILLING optional 21 Page 261 CAE 22 ROUGH
187. ece blank is displayed as It was FORM programmed with BLK FORM e With the WINDOW BLANK FORM soft key the TNC returns the graphic of the workpiece blank to its originally programmed dimensions HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 381 il Measuring the machining time Program Run modes of operation The timer counts and displays the time from program start to program end The timer stops whenever machining is interrupted Test Run The timer displays the time that the TNC calculates from the duration of tool movements The time calculated by the TNC can only conditionally be used for calculating the production time because the TNC does not account for the duration of machine dependent interruptions such as tool change 11 1 Graphics Activating the stopwatch function Shift the soft key rows until the TNC displays the following soft keys with the stopwatch functions Stopwatch functions Y Store displayed time STORE Display the sum of stored time apo and displayed time SUS Clear displayed time a 382 11 Test Run and Program Run il 11 2 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space Function This MOD function enables you to graphically check the position of the workpiece blank or reference point in the machine s working space and to activate work space monitoring in the Test Run mode of operation This function is activated with the datum set soft key Another transparent cuboid represents the workpiece blank Its
188. ee Vor 7 Son THR TS DE rie 538 1 23 5936 K 28 71430 2 10 591 Y 35 797 147 153 1459 553 p Rel 14 61 693 416 818 175 77 p res Tea 5 iz Li misao 108 Ome c 17 5 cala tr ir Es Iv b E 5 i 25400 7 m a a 30 A 12 0 le l i ax d j 11 1 Graphics 11 1 Graphics Function In the program run modes of operation as well as in the Test Run mode the TNC provides the following three display modes Using soft keys select whether you desire Plan view Projection in 3 planes 3 D view The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as If it were being machined with a cylindrical end mill If a tool table is active you can also simulate the machining operation with a spherical cutter For this purpose enter R2 R in the tool table The TNC will not show a graphic if the current program has no valid blank form definition no program is selected iE The graphic simulation is not possible for program sections or programs in which rotary axis movements are defined In this case the TNC will display an error message 376 11 Test Run and Program Run il Overview of display modes The control displays the following soft keys in the Program Run and Test Run modes of operation Plan view LJ Projection in 3 planes Y io a Sem O q q q 3 D view Limitations during program run A graphical representation of a running program is not possible if the mi
189. eed rate for countersinking 5 The tool then moves on a semicircle to the starting point Thread milling 6 The TNC positions the tool to the starting point if there has been no previous countersinking at front Starting point for thread milling starting point for countersinking at front 7 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step 8 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement 9 Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset movements or in one continuous movement 10 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling i il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling f boina and Thread Milling 11 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or If programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 220 8 Programming Cycles il Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread d
190. efined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 or M20 depending on the machine If you program M19 or M20 without having defined Cycle 13 the TNC positions the machine tool spindle to an angle that has been set by the machine manufacturer see your machine manual 12 Angle of orientation Enter the angle according to i the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 360 Input resolution 0 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 8 Special Cycles Example NC blocks j il 9 1 Labeling Subprograms and nm D Program Section Repeats oc Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired Q Labels Q The beginnings of subprograms and program section repeats are DN marked in a part program by labels e A label is identified by a number between 1 and 65 534 or by a name you define Each LABEL number or LABEL name can be set only once Sa in the program with LABEL SET The number of label names you can a enter is only limited by the internal memory Som O S Do not use a label number or label name more than once O LABEL O LBL 0 is used exclusively to mark the end of a subprogram and can therefore be used as often as desired 9 1 Labeling Subprograms ar 298 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 9 2 Subprograms Operating sequence 1 The TNC
191. electing the screen layout see Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block page 32 Program Run Full Sequence and Program Run Single Block In the Program Run Full Sequence mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to Its end or to a manual or programmed stop You can resume program run after an interruption Inthe Program Run Single Block mode of operation you execute each block separately by pressing the machine START button Soft keys for selecting the screen layout Program Left program right status PROGRAM STATUS Left program right graphics PROGRAM GRAPHICS Graphics 32 Positioning With mdi BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X Y 0 2 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z 52000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 R FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 TASCHENFRASEN CYCL DEF 4 1 ABSTZ CYCL DEF 4 2 TIEFE 10 CYCL DEF 4 3 ZUSTLG10 F333 WOON OUBUNP N 22 CYCL DEF 3 NUTENFRAESEN 23 CYCL DEF 3 1 ABSTZ AX M99 31 CYCL DEF 3 0 NUTENFRAESEN Program run full sequence TSE BEGIN PGM 113 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z 52000 L Z 10 RO FMAX M3 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX CYCL DEF 4 0 PECKING CYCL DEF 4 1 SET UPZ CYCL DEF 4 2 DEPTH 10 9 CYCL DEF 4 3 PLNGNG1 F333 10 CYCL DEF 4 4 X 30 11 CYCL DEF 4 5 Y 90 12 CYCL DEF 4 6 F888 DR RADIUSS 13 L Z 2 RO FMAX M99 14 CYCL DEF 5 0 CIRCULAR POCKET
192. ellaneous function M Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 7 1 Entering Miscell aneousync ons M and STOP j il 72 Miscellaneous Functions for Program Run Control Spindle O and Coolant Q E Overview o M__ Effect Effectiveatblock Start End y MOO Stop program run e Spindle STOP O Coolant OFF Y M01 Optional program STOP 7 M02 Stop program run h Spindle STOP E Coolant OFF Go to block 1 O Clear the status display dependent on the clearMode machine parameter Ce M03 Spindle ON clockwise M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise M05 Spindle STOP O M06 Tool change machine dependent A function spindle STOP u Stop program run 2 M08 Coolant ON Y e M09 Coolant OFF phar M13 Spindle ON clockwise O Coolant ON Sc M14 Spindle ON counterclockwise LL Coolant ON Z M30 Same as M02 0 Ga amp O O 2 N pa 162 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 7 3 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Scale reference point On the scale a reference mark indicates the position of the scale reference point Machine datum The machine datum is required for the following tasks Defining the limits of traverse software limit switches Moving to machine referenced positions such as tool change positions Setting the workpiece datum The distance in each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by
193. ensation the TNC takes the delta values from both the TOOL CALL block and the tool table into account Compensation value R DRroo caLL DR ag where R is the tool radius R from the TOOL DEF block or tool table DR TOOL CALL is the oversize for radius DR in the TOOL CALL block not taken into account by the position display DR 718 is the oversize for radius DR in the tool table Contouring without radius compensation RO The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path or to the programmed coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning 110 5 Programming Tools il Tool movements with radius compensation RR and RL RR The tool moves to the right of the programmed contour RL The tool moves to the left of the programmed contour The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the radius Right or left are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement along the workpiece contour See figures at right gt Between two program blocks with different radius compensations RR and RL you must program at least one traversing block in the working plane without radius compensation that is with RO Radius compensation does not take effect until the end of the block in which it is first programmed Whenever radius compensation is activated with RR RL or canceled with RO the TNC positions the tool perpendicular to th
194. ental value Distance between tool tio and workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling i il d Thread Milling apping an m X D 3 2 o O zZ e 2 A 8 2 Cycles for Drilling 218 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling 8 Programming Cycles il OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking at front 2 The TNC moves in the reference axis of the working plane from the center of the stud to the starting point for countersinking at front The position of the starting point is determined by the thread radius tool radius and pitch 3 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the sinking depth at front 4 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the f
195. enter a low value if you have already cleared the stud enter a higher feed rate gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 gt Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane gt Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute value Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane gt Workpiece blank diameter 0222 Diameter of the premachined stud for calculating the pre position Enter the workpiece blank diameter to be greater than the diameter of the finished part gt Diameter of finished part 0223 Diameter of the finished stud Enter the diameter of the finished part to be less than the workpiece blank diameter HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 m x 3 D Z O z O O o 23 ockets Studs and Slots 8 3 Cycles for Milli SLOT oblong hole with reciprocating plunge cut Cycle 210 Roughing 1 Atrapid traverse the TNC positions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the left circle From th
196. entered the TNC should alt Use the machine parameter suppressDepthErr to define output an error message on or not off Danger of collision 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 188 8 Programming Cycles il Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement If the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth gt Dwell time at top 0210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip release gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Decrement 0212 incremental value Value by which the TN
197. entered starting position above the first plunging depth 5 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement 6 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached 7 The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX d Thread Mill oping an gt Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction lf you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed Use the machine parameter suppressDepthErr to define uy whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 192 8 Programming Cycles il 205 Ce Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth 0201 in
198. epart the workpiece in the direction of the radius compensation i e to the right with RR or to the left with RL Enter R as a positive value E f the tool should depart the workpiece in the direction opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a negative value Example NC blocks Departing on a circular arc tangentially connecting the contour and a straight line DEP LCT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves on a straight line to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected both to the last contour element and to the line from Py to Py Once these lines are known the radius R then suffices to completely define the tool path gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation gt Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LCT soft key DEP LOT Enter the coordinates of the end point Py Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positive value Example NC blocks 24 Last contour element Pg with radius compensation Center angle 180 arc radius 8 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Last contour element Pg with radius compensation Coordinates Py arc radius 8 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program 6 Programming Programming Contours il 6 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Overview of path functions Line L Straight
199. epth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Threads per step 0355 Number of thread revolutions by which the tool is offset see figure at lower right 0 one helical line to the thread depth 1 continuous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by 0355 multiplied by the pitch Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with MOS 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Q200 Q204 Q355 gt 1 8 2 Cycles for Drilling ene and Thread Milling i il d Thread Milling oping an m X D 3 2 o O zZ O 2 A 8 2 Cycles for Drilling 222 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth at front Q358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool gt Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the stud center gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the too
200. equires a code number for the following functions Select user parameters 123 Enable access to Ethernet configuration NET123 Enable special functions for 555343 O parameter programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 12 3 Entering Code Numbers o il Y Machine Specific User Parameters 12 4 Machine Specific User Parameters Function To enable you to set machine specific functions your machine tool builder can define which machine parameters are available as user parameters y Refer to your machine manual 400 12 MOD Functions il 12 5 Position Display Types Function In the Manual Operation mode and in the Program Run modes of operation you can select the type of coordinates to be displayed The figure at right shows the different tool positions Starting position Target position of the tool Workpiece datum Machine datum The TNC position displays can show the following coordinates Nominal position the value presently NOML commanded by the TNC Actual position current tool position ACTL Reference position the actual position relative to REF ACTL the machine datum Reference position the nominal position relative REF NOML to the machine datum Servo lag difference between nominal and actual LAG positions following error Distance remaining to the programmed position DIST difference between actual and target positions With the MOD function Position display 1 you can sele
201. er devices mount Manual operation Programm i ng GF Make sure that the person configuring your TNC is a network specialist Mount Auto Mount point Mount device 1 HOME N Nde 1PC5312 work The parameters username workgroup and password do not necoros eke networis connection versions Mount device Nde 1PC5323N transfer need to be entered in all Windows operating systems ban ae E File system SMB gt SMBROP ECON Tirano Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC 1P m een username a13605 In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key Uorkareup o Password 2 sO HEHEHE Weitere SMB Optionen e Automatic connection YES Press the MOD key Enter the code number NET123 Press the DEFINE NETWORK CONNECTN soft key It opens the dialog window for the network configuration Mount device Connection over NFS Directory name to be mounted This is formed from the network address of the device a colon and the name of the directory Enter the network address as four decimal numbers separated by periods dotted decimal notation Use the correct capitalization when entering the path To connect Individual Windows computers enter the network name and the share name of the computer e g PC1791NT C 12 9 Ethernet Interface Mount point Device name The device name entered here is displayed on the control in the program management for the mounted network e g WORLD
202. ere the TNC positions the tool to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool moves at the feed rate for milling to the workpiece surface From there the cutter advances in the longitudinal direction of the slot plunge cutting obliquely into the material until it reaches the center of the right circle 3 The tool then moves back to the center of the left circle again with oblique plunge cutting This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached 4 Atthe milling depth the TNC moves the tool for the purpose of face milling to the other end of the slot and then back to the center of the slot Finishing Y ad 2 Y O S Y O ad Y YN sj d n OQ 5 The TNC positions the tool in the center of the left circle and then moves it tangentially in a semicircle to the left end of the slot The tool subsequently climb mills the contour with M3 and if so entered in more than one infeed 6 When the tool reaches the end of the contour It departs the contour tangentially and returns to the center of the left circle At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance CS Before programming note the following 8 3 Cycles for Milli The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane During roughing the tool plunges into the mat
203. erial with a sideward reciprocating motion from one end of the slot to the other Pilot drilling is therefore unnecessary The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width and not smaller than a third of the slot width The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot length The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle 238 8 Programming Cycles il att Danger of collision Use the machine parameter suppressDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 210 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance c between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Plunging depth Q202 incremental value Total extent by which the tool is fed in the tool axis during a reciprocating movement Machining operation 0 1 2 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Workpiece
204. ersize is entered in the tool table for wear Delta values are usually entered as numerical values In a TOOL CALL block you can also assign the values to O parameters Input range You can enter a delta value with up to 99 999 mm gt Delta values from the tool table influence the graphical representation of the tool The representation of the workpiece remains the same in the simulation Delta values trom the TOOL CALL block change the represented size of the workpiece during the simulation The simulated tool size remains the same Entering tool data into the program The number length and radius of a specific tool is defined in the TOOL DEF block of the part program To select tool definition press the TOOL DEF key Tool number Each toolis uniquely identified by its tool DEF number Tool length Compensation value for the tool length Tool radius Compensation value for the tool radius lt lt In the programming dialog you can transfer the value for tool length and tool radius directly into the input line by pressing the desired axis soft key Example HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 E 5 2 Tool Data m 5 2 Tool Data Entering tool data in the table You can define and store up to 9999 tools and their tool data in a tool table Also see the Editing Functions later in this Chapter In order to be able to assign various compensation data to a tool indexing tool number insert a line and extend the tool
205. esult 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle index too large value outside of value range or incorrect data format SQL UPDATE Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT Data bank Index for SQL result Row number within the result set The table entries prepared in the O parameters are written to this row If you do not enter an index the first row Is written to n 0 Either enter the row number directly or program the O parameter containing the index SOL INSERT SQL INSERT generates a new row in the result set and transfers the data prepared in the O parameters into the new row SQL INSERT takes into account all columns entered in the Select command Table columns not entered in the Select command are filled with default values Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle value outside of value range or incorrect data format SQL INSERT Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT 354 Example Row number is transferred in a O parameter m x o 3 D J g 5 3 o D D y O re o 3 3 D o o D O lt Example Row number is transferred in a O parameter 10 Programming O Param
206. eter Q30 and in the following five parameters i e to O35 The TNC then stores the circle center of the reference axis X with spindle axis Z in Parameter 020 the circle center of the minor axis Y with spindle axis Z in Parameter 021 and the circle radius in Parameter O22 FN24 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from four ma points OF CIRCLE Example FN24 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs for four points of the circle must be stored in Parameter Q30 and in the following seven parameters i e to 037 The TNC then stores the circle center of the reference axis X with spindle axis Z in Parameter Q20 the circle center of the minor axis Y with spindle axis Z in Parameter Q21 and the circle radius in Parameter Q22 C Note that FN23 and FN24 automatically overwrite the resulting parameter and the two following parameters HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 5 Calculating Circles i il 10 6 e Decisions with O Parameters 10 6 If Then Decisions with O Parameters Function The TNC can make logical lf Then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another O parameter or with a numerical value If the condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the label that is programmed after the condition for information on labels see Labeling Subprograms and Program Section Repeats page 298 If it is not fulfilled the TNC continues with the next block To call another program as a subprogram enter PGM CALL after the bloc
207. eters SOL COMMIT SQL COMMIT transfers all rows in the result set back to the table A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE is canceled The handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle or equal entries in columns requiring unique entries SQL COMMIT Data bank SQL access ID O parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT SOL ROLLBACK The execution of SQL ROLLBACK depends on whether INDEX is programmed E f INDEX is not programmed The result set is not written back to the table any changes insertions are discarded The transaction Is closed and the handle given in the SQL SELECT command loses its validity Typical application Ending a transaction solely containing read accesses E f INDEX is programmed The indexed row remains All other rows are deleted from the result set The transaction is not concluded A lock set with SELECT FOR UPDATE remains for the indexed row For all other rows it Is reset Parameter no for result O parameter in which the SOL server reports the result 0 No error occurred 1 Error occurred incorrect handle SAL ROLLBACK gt Data bank SQL access ID Q parameter with the handle for identifying the result set also see SQL SELECT gt Data bank Index for SQL result Row that is t
208. ey Enter all known data in the block by using the soft keys 6 Programming Programming Contours il Input possibilities End point coordinates Cartesian coordinates X and Y Polar coordinates referenced to FPOL ur Programming Example NC blocks Direction and length of contour elements 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C Length of a straight line SA Y Gradient angle of a straight line a Chord length LEN of the arc lt j Gradient angle AN of the entry tangent Center angle of the arc Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 147 il O ur Programmin Q 0 hom LL Y LL Y de nur e Q me 0 lo Circle center CC radius and direction of rotation in the FC FCT block The TNC calculates a circle center for free programmed arcs from the data you enter This makes it possible to program full circles in an FK program block If you wish to define the circle center in polar coordinates you must use FPOL not CC to define the pole FPOL is entered in Cartesian coordinates and remains in effect until the TNC encounters a block in which another FPOL is defined gt A circle center that was calculated or programmed conventionally is then no longer valid as a pole or circle center for the new FK contour If you enter conventional polar coordinates that refer to a pole from a CC block you have defined previously then you mus
209. f the error window To clear the error message in the header Press the CE button gt In some operating modes such as the Editing mode the CE button cannot be used to clear the error since the button is reserved for other functions Clearing more than one error Open the error window Clear individual errors Position the highlight on the error message and press the DELETE soft key Clear all errors Press the DELETE ALL soft key DELETE DELETE ALL iE If the cause of the error has not been removed the error message cannot be deleted In this case the error message remains in the window HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Program run 7 full sequence Programming FK programming Illegal positioning block pros ing g positioning Cause Within an unresolved FK sequence you programmed an illegal positioning block other than FK blocks RND CHF APPR DEP gt and L blocks With motion components exclusively perpendicular to the FK plane Action First resolve the FK sequence completely or delete illegal positioning blocks Geometry functions that are defined over the gray contouring keys and have coordinates in the Working plane are illegal exception RND gt CHF APPR DEP gt DELETE INFO DETAILS LOG FILE ALL DELETE END 91 Messages 4 8 The Erro 4 8 The e Messages Error log file The TNC stores errors and important events e g system startup in en error log file The capacity of the err
210. f the material 190 8 Programming Cycles il Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth of counterbore 0249 incremental value Distance between underside of workpiece and the top of the hole A positive sign means the hole will be bored in the positive spindle axis direction Material thickness 0250 incremental value Thickness of the workpiece gt Off center distance 0251 incremental value Off center distance for the boring bar value from tool data sheet Tool edge height 0252 incremental value Distance between the underside of the boring bar and the main cutting tooth value from tool data sheet gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min gt Feed rate for countersinking 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min gt Dwell time 0255 Dwell time in seconds at the top of the bore hole gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 0214 Determine the direction in which the TNC displaces the tool by the off center distance after spindle orientation 1 Retract tool in the negativ
211. f thread or sinking depth at front determines the working direction The working direction is defined in the following sequence 1st Depth of thread 2nd Depth at front If you program a depth parameter to be 0 the TNC does not execute that step The type of milling up cut climb is determined by the thread right hand left hand and the direction of tool rotation since it is only possible to work in the direction of the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling il Bulli Peay pue Burd Huima 40 SIDAD Z 8 8 Programming Cycles il 216 265 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min Depth at front 0358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Countersinking offset at front 0359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Countersink Q360 Execution of the chamfer 0 before thread machining 1 after thread machining Set up clearance 0200 increm
212. feed rate 0209 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely in the material enter 0209 to be smaller than 0207 If you are moving it transversely in the open 0209 may be greater than 0207 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and milling depth for positioning at the start and end of the cycle m x D S D O E O O HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 26 co 8 6 UN for Multipass Milling 8 6 m for Multipass Milling RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 2 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling 3 From this point the tool moves at rapid traverse FMAX by the tool diameter in the positive tool axis direction and then back to Starting point 1 4 At the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool back to the last traversed Z value 5 Then the TNC moves the tool in all three axes from point 1 in the direction of point 4 to the next line 6 From this point the tool moves to the stopping point on this pass The TNC calculates the end point from point 2 and a movement in the direction of point 3 7 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 8 At the end of the cycle the tool is positioned above the highest programmed point
213. fine the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Define the datum for polar coordinates Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Move to point 2 Move to point 3 Move to point 4 Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 1 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 Programming Programming Contours T m O 2 m rA rad I z a Z Y zj Q Z 2 O Q y 3 O 0 ot y ad p O y 0 lt o c O gt 109 e ae x lt Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Transfer the last programmed position as the pole Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Helical interpolation Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program Identify beginning of program section repeat Enter the thread pitch as an incremental IZ dimension 141 olar Coordinates 6 5 Path como Polar Coordinates 142 Program the number of repeats thread revolutions 6 Programming Programming Contours il 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming Fundamentals Workpiece drawings that are not dimensioned for NC often
214. for up to 99 blocks Tool compensation hree dimensional tool radius compensation Tool table Save tool data centrally Tool table Multiple tool tables with any number of tools Cutting data tables Calculation of spindle speed and feed rate Constant contouring speed Relative to the path of the tool center or relative to the tool s cutting edge Parallel operation Creating programs while another program is being run Tilt working plane Rotary table machining Programming of cylindrical contours as if in two axes Rotary table machining Feed rate in mm min Approaching and departing the contour Via a straight line or arc FK free contour programming Programming of workpieces not correctly dimensioned for NC programming Program jumps Subprograms and program section repeats Program jumps Calling any program as subprogram Test graphics Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Programming graphics 2 D line graphics HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 gt lt X X X X X X X X XI XI XIXI XIXI X X X XI XI K K X gt lt gt lt X X X X il Machining graphics Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Datum tables for storing workpiece related datums Preset table for saving reference points presets Returning to the contour with mid program startup Returning to the contour after program interruption Autostart Actual position capture Actual positions can be transferred to the NC progr
215. ften depends on the unit and type of data transfer The table below shows the connector pin layout on the adapter block Yellow White Brown Black Violet WH GN Green Hso Hsg Hsg Ext shield Hsg CO CO J O CI A O N gt O N 0 gt O1 MD NM WwW gt G 2 fat lt Ethernet interface RJ45 socket Maximum cable length Unshielded 100 m Shielded 400 m 1 TX Transmit Data 2 TX Transmit Data 3 REC Recelve Data 4 Vacant 5 Vacant 6 REC Receive Data 7 Vacant 8 Vacant HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 14 1 Pin A e Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces K il 14 2 Technical Information Explanation of symbols Standard Axis option Description Programming Position entry Tool Compensations Tool tables Constant cutting speed Background programming Contour elements Contour approach and departure FK free contour programming Program jumps 438 14 2 Technical Information Basic version 3 axes plus spindle 1st additional axis for 4 axes and open loop or closed loop spindle 2nd additional axis for 5 axes and open loop spindle HEIDENHAIN conversational Nominal positions for line segments and arcs in Cartesian or polar coordinates Absolute or incremental dimensions Display and entry in mm or inches Tool radius in the working plane and tool length Calculating the radius compensated contour up to 99 blocks in advance M120 Multiple tool tables with any
216. functions Axis locked Override setting in percent o g Axis can be moved with the handwheel Axes are moving under a basic rotation No active program a e Program run started El Program run stopped ol Program run is being aborted x HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 33 o AL A Y 4 er Y Y Additional status displays The additional status displays contain detailed information on the program run They can be called in all operating modes except for the Programming and Editing mode of operation To switch on the additional status display Call the soft key row for screen layout U Select the layout option for the additional status STATUS display To select an additional status display Shift the soft key rows until the STATUS soft keys appear Select the desired additional status display e g ee general program information You can choose between several additional status displays with the following soft keys General program information 1 Name of the active main program Active programs Active machining cycle Circle center CC pole Machining time Oo o1 P OOJ N Dwell time counter Programs 08 08 00 6 D 00 00 00 1 Introduction il Positions and coordinates 1 Type of position display e g actual 2 iB eae Pos position 0 0009 2 Position display 0 000 3 Number of the active datum from the preset table f
217. gram chosen with SEL PGM 366 10 Programming O Parameters il Program sequence The contour of the ellipse is approximated by many short lines defined in Q7 The more calculation steps you define for the lines the smoother the curve becomes The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting and end angles in the plane Clockwise machining direction starting angle gt end angle Counterclockwise machining direction starting angle lt end angle The tool radius is not taken into account HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Center in X axis Center in Y axis Semiaxis in X Semiaxis in Y Starting angle in the plane End angle in the plane Number of calculation steps Rotational position of the ellipse Milling depth Feed rate for plunging Feed rate for milling Set up clearance tor pre positioning Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the too Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program 367 10 13 Programming Examples 10 13 Programming Examples Subprogram 10 Machining operation Shift datum to center of ellipse Account tor rotational position in the plane Calculate angle increment Copy starting angle Set counter Calculate X coordinate for starting point Calculate Y coordinate for starting point Move to starting point in th
218. gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface ockets Studs and Slots gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur m x 3 D Z O z O O z gt Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane gt Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute value Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane gt First side length 0218 incremental value Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane gt Second side length 0219 incremental value Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane gt Corner radius 0220 Radius of the pocket corner If you make no entry here the TNC assumes that the corner radius is equal to the tool radius 8 3 Cycles for Milli Allowance in 1st axis 0221 incremental value Allowance for pre positioning in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the length of the pocket HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 229 il 8 3 Cycles for mm ockets Studs and Slots STUD FINISHING Cycle 213 1 CS The TNC moves the tool in the tool axis to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and subsequently to the center of the stud From the stud center the tool moves in the working plane to the s
219. h a table nead combination the TNC ignores the swivel head rotary axes The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in mm min With this miscellaneous function the TNC calculates the feed rate for each block at the start of the block With a rotary axis the feed rate is not changed during execution of the block even if the tool moves toward the center of the rotary axis Effect M116 is effective in the working plane With M117 you can reset M116 M116 is also canceled at the end of the program M116 becomes effective at the start of block 172 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 Standard behavior The standard behavior of the TNC while positioning rotary axes whose display has been reduced to values less than 360 is decided by the machine tool builder They decide whether the TNC should consider the difference between nominal and actual position or whether the TNC should always even without M126 choose the shortest path to the programmed position Examples 350 10 340 10 340 330 Behavior with M126 With M126 the TNC will move the axis on the shorter path of traverse if you reduce display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 Examples 350 10 20 10 340 30 Effect M126 becomes effective at the start of block To cancel M126 enter M127 At the end of program M126 is automatically canceled HEIDENHAIN TNC
220. he following DNS server addresses Prefered DNS server r Alternate DNS server 12 9 Ethernet Interface 414 12 MOD Functions 13 1 Introduction m Overview 5 The following functions are available in the Manual mode Som Function St Key Page Calibrate the effective length ca L Page 417 m es Mm eras E Hem alibrate the effective radius Page 418 AD Measure a basic rotation using a line ROTATION Page 420 Set the datum in any axis Page 422 oe Set a corner as datum PROBING Page 423 EL Set the circle center as datum PROBING Page 424 Touch probe system data management PARAMETER Page 424 R2 1 689 FO 1000 Fl 200 Selecting probe cycles Select the Manual Operation or Electronic Handwheel mode of operation aan To choose the touch probe functions press the TOUCH PROBE soft key The TNC displays additional soft keys see table above ROTATION To select the probe cycle press the appropriate soft key for example PROBING ROT and the TNC displays the associated menu 416 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il 13 2 Calibrating a Touch Trigger Probe Introduction The touch probe must be calibrated in the following cases Commissioning Stylus breakage Stylus exchange Change in the probe feed rate Irregularities caused for example when the machine heats up During calibration the TNC finds the effective leng
221. he highlight to the desired directory in the left hand window the right hand window automatically shows all files stored in the highlighted directory 64 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Step 3 Select a file SELECT Press the SELECT TYPE soft key TYPE el SELECT Press the soft key for the desired file type or SHOW ALL Press the SHOW ALL soft key to display all files or une Move the highlight to the desired file in the right window SELECT The selected file is opened in the operating mode trom which you have called the File Manager Press the SELECT soft key or the ENT key A ENT Creating a new directory Move the highlight in the left window to the directory in which you want to create a subdirectory EN Enter the new file name and confirm with ENT Press the OK soft key to confirm or abort with the CANCEL soft key CANCEL HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th ear Manager ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the Mil Manager Copying a single file Move the highlight to the file you wish to copy cory Press the COPY soft key to select the copy function aac The TNC opens a pop up window Enter the name of the destination file and confirm your st entry with the ENT key or OK soft key The TNC copies the file to the active directory or to the corresponding destination directory The original file is retained Copying a directory Move the hig
222. he setup clearance you define how far from the defined or calculated touch point the probe is to be pre positioned The smaller the value you enter the more exactly must you define the touch point position Maximum measuring range If the stylus is not deflected within the defined path the TNC outputs an error message HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 13 6 Touch Probe Data Management S il 13 7 Automatic Workpiece Measurement 13 7 Automatic Workpiece Measurement Overview The TNC offers three cycles for measuring workpieces and setting the datum automatically To define the cycles press the TOUCH PROBE key in the Programming and Editing or Positioning with MDI operating mode O REFERENCE PLANE Measuring a coordinate in a E selectable axis Ly A 1 POLAR DATUM PLANE Measuring a point in a 1 probing direction aD 3 MEASURE Measuring the position and diameter of a hole Reference system for measurement results The TNC transfers all the measurement results to the result parameters and the protocol file in the active coordinate system or as the case may be the displaced coordinate system DATUM PLANE touch probe cycle 0 1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle 2 Then the touch probe approaches the workpiece at the assigned feed rate The probing direction is to be defined in the cycle 3 After the TNC has saved the position the probe retracts to the starting po
223. hining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate Starting point in 1st axis 0225 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Starting point in 2nd axis 0226 absolute value Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Starting point in 3rd axis 0227 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface used to calculate the infeeds End point in 3rd axis 0386 absolute value Coordinate in the spindle axis to which the surface is to be face milled First side length 0218 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first milling path in reference to the starting point in the 1st axis Second side length 0219 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the minor axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first stepover in reference to the starting point in the 2nd axis Q227 Q386 8 Programming Cycles il Maximum plunging depth 0202 incremental value Maximum amount that the tool is advanced each time The TNC calculates the actual plunging depth from the difference between the end point and starting point of the tool axis taking the finishing allowance into account so that uniform pl
224. hlight in the left window onto the directory you want to copy Instead of the COPY soft key press the COPY DIR soft key Subdirectories can be copied by the TNC at the same time Making a setting in a selection box In various dialogs the TNC opens a pop up window in which you can make settings in selection boxes Move the cursor into the desired selection box and press the GOTO key Use the arrow keys to position the cursor to the required setting With the OK soft key you confirm the value and with the CANCEL soft key you discard the selection 66 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Choosing one of the last 10 files selected Call the file manager MGT Last Display the last 10 files selected Press the LAST rst FILES soft key Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the file you wish to select Moves the highlight up and down within a window Select a file Press the OK soft key or ENT Deleting a file Move the highlight to the file you want to delete DELETE To select the erasing function press the DELETE soft Key To confirm press the OK soft key To abort erasure press the CANCEL soft key Deleting a directory Delete all files and subdirectories stored in the directory that you want to delete Move the highlight to the directory you want to delete DELETE To select delete function press the DELETE ALL soft key The TNC asks whether you really want to erase the s
225. ical keypad at right The O parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row To select the additional functions press the DIVERSE FUNCTIONS soft key Select FN25 Switch the soft key row to the second level press the FN25 DATUM SET soft key Axis Enter the axis where you wish to set the new datum and confirm with ENT Value to be calculated Enter the coordinate for the new datum point in the active coordinate system New datum Enter the coordinate that the value to be converted should have in the new coordinate system Example Set a new datum at the current coordinate X 100 Example The current coordinate Z 50 will have the value 20 in the new coordinate system 10 Programming O Parameters il FN29 PLC Transferring values to the PLC The function FN 29 PLC transfers up to eight numerical values or O parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 0017 to the PLC HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 8 Additional Functions il 10 8 Additional Functions FN37 EXPORT You need the FN37 EXPORT function if you want to create your own cycles and integrate them in the TNC The O parameters 0 to 99 are effective only locally This means that the O parameters are effective only in the program in which they were defined With the FN37 EXPORT function you can export locally effective Q parameters into another calling program Exa
226. ighted Soft key selection keys Switches the soft key rows Sets the screen layout Shift key for switchover between machining and programming modes Soft key selection keys for machine tool builders 8 Switches soft key rows for machine tool builders Oo o1 a W Screen layout You select the screen layout yourself In the programming mode of operation for example you can have the TNC show program blocks in the left window while the right window displays programming graphics You could also display status information in the right window instead of the graphics or display only program blocks in one large window The available screen windows depend on the selected operating mode To change the screen layout Press the SPLIT SCREEN key The soft key row VQ shows the available layout options see Modes of Operation page 31 PRoGRan Select the desired screen layout GRAPHICS HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 HEIDENHAIN Manual operation _ MS 0 S IST ST 1 500 SENm 0 O S a hom 0 O O i _ gt ss AL O C AL gt N q 1 2 Visual Display Unit and Operating a Operating panel The TNC 320 is delivered with an integrated keyboard The figure at right shows the controls and displays of the keyboard 1 OF Ab W N The functions of the individual keys are described on the inside front cover EJ described in the manu
227. il Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element ur Programming Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 155 il ur Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C 56 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth 6 Programming Programming Contours il Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element ur Programming Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C Retract in the tool axis end program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 157 il pr 7 1 Entering Miscettaneousflnctions M and STOP 7 1 Entering Miscellaneous Functions M and STOP Fundamentals With the TNC s miscellaneous functions also called M functions you can affect Program run e g a program interruption Machine functions such as switching spindle rotation and coolant supply on and off Contouring behavior of the tool y The machine tool builder may add some M functions that are not described in this User s Manual Also the machine tool bu
228. il HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking at front 2 If countersinking is before thread milling the tool moves at the feed rate for countersinking to the sinking depth at front If countersinking Is after thread milling the tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth 3 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 4 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 5 The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread 6 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement 7 The tool moves on a continuous helical downward path until it reaches the thread depth 8 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 9 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool in rapid traverse to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance GF Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign of the cycle parameters depth o
229. il service heidenhain de Measuring systems 49 8669 31 3104 E Mail service ms support heidenhain de TNC support gt 49 8669 31 3101 E Mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E Mail service nc ogm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E Mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls lt gt 49 711 952803 0 E Mail service hsf heidenhain de www heidenhain de 3 D Touch Probe Systems from HEIDENHAIN help you to reduce non cutting time For example in e workpiece alignment e datum setting e workpiece measurement digitizing 3 D surfaces with the workpiece touch probes TS 220 with cable TS 640 with infrared transmission e tool measurement e wear monitoring e tool breakage monitoring with the tool touch probe TT 130 Ve 00 50 671 20 SWO 6 3 2006 FIN Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice AN
230. ilder can change the meaning and effect of the M functions described here Refer to your machine manual You can enter up to two M functions at the end of a positioning block or in a separate block The TNC displays the following dialog question Miscellaneous function M You usually enter only the number of the M function in the programming dialog Some M functions can be programmed with additional parameters In this case the dialog is continued for the parameter input In the Manual Operation and Electronic Handwheel modes of operation the M functions are entered with the M soft key Please note that some M functions become effective at the start of a positioning block and others at the end regardless of their position in the NC block M functions come into effect in the block in which they are called Some M functions are effective only in the block in which they are programmed Unless the M function is only effective blockwise either you must cancel it in a subsequent block with a separate M function or it is automatically canceled by the TNC at the end of the program 160 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Entering an M function in a STOP block If you program a STOP block the program run or test run Is interrupted at the block for example for tool inspection You can also enter an M function in a STOP block To program an interruption of program run press the STOP key Enter misc
231. in the following sequence 1st Depth of thread 2nd Total hole depth Srd Depth at front If you program a depth parameter to be 0 the TNC does not execute that step Program the thread depth as a value smaller than the total hole depth by at least one third the thread pitch HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling Bulli Peay pue Burd Huima 40 SIDAD Z 8 8 Programming Cycles il 212 264 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Thread depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Total hole depth 0356 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool when moving in and out of the workpiece in mm min Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with MOS 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement If the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth Upper advanced stop distance 0258 incremental value Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves
232. in the tool axis offset by the tool diameter Cutting motion The starting point and therefore the milling direction is selectable because the TNC always moves from point 1 to point 2 and in the total movement from point 1 2 to point 3 4 You can program point 1 at any corner of the surface to be machined If you are using an end mill for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following ways A shaping cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 greater than spindle axis coordinate of point 2 for slightly inclined surfaces A drawing cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 smaller than spindle axis coordinate of point 2 for steep surfaces When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 parallel to the direction of the steeper inclination If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following way When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 perpendicular to the direction of the steepest inclination e Before programming note the following The TNC positions the tool from the current position in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation RO to the programmed positions If required use a
233. inates and moves to the position X 100 see figure at upper right Movement in the main planes The program block contains two coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in the programmed plane Example The tool retains the Z coordinate and moves in the XY plane to the X 70 Y 50 position see figure at center right Three dimensional movement The program block contains three coordinates The TNC thus moves the tool in space to the programmed position Example HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Y 2 pur O LL me d X bj 100 ra a Lo LL N Y E pur O Sc LL os ra 0 ej 6 2 Fundament Circles and circular arcs The TNC moves two axes simultaneously in a circular path relative to the workpiece You can define a circular movement by entering the circle center CC When you program a circle the control assigns it to one of the main planes This plane is defined automatically when you set the spindle axis during a TOOL CALL Z XY also UV XV UY Y ZX also WU ZU WX X YZ also VW YW VZ Direction of rotation DR for circular movements If a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the direction of rotation DR Clockwise direction of rotation DR Counterclockwise direction of rotation DR 116 6 Programming Programming Contours il Radius compens
234. ing a new part program 76 Programming tool movements in conversational format 78 Actual position capture 79 Editing a program 80 The TNC search function 83 12 4 5 Interactive Programming Graphics 85 Generating Not generating graphics during programming 85 Generating a graphic for an existing program 85 Block number display ON OFF 86 Erasing the graphic 86 Magnifying or reducing a detail 86 4 6 Adding Comments 87 Function 87 Adding a comment line 87 Functions for editing of the comment 87 4 7 Integrated Pocket Calculator 88 Operation 88 4 8 The Error Messages 90 Display of errors 90 Open the error window 90 Close the error window 90 Detailed error messages 91 DETAILS soft key 91 Clearing errors 91 Error log file sexes 92 Keystroke log file 92 Informational texts 93 Saving service files 93 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data 96 Feed rate F 96 Spindle speed S 97 5 2 Tool Data 98 Requirements for tool compensation 98 Tool numbers and tool names 98 Tool length L 98 Tool radius R 99 Delta values for lengths and radii 99 Entering tool data into the program 99 Entering tool data in the table 100 Pocket table for tool changer 104 Calling tool data 106 Tool change 107 5
235. inning of a program section repeat is marked by the label LBL The end of a program section repeat is identified by CALL LBL REP Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the end of the program section CALL LBL REP 2 Then the program section between the called LBL and the label call is repeated the number of times entered after REP 3 The TNC then resumes the part program after the last repetition Programming notes You can repeat a program section up to 65 534 times in succession The total number of times the program section is executed is always one more than the programmed number of repeats Programming a program section repeat iat To mark the beginning press the LBL SET key and entera LABEL NUMBER for the program section you wish to repeat If you want to use a label name press the key to switch to text entry Enter the program section Calling a program section repeat Press the LBL CALL key and enter the label number of CALL the program section you want to repeat as well as the number of repeats with Repeat REP 300 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 0 BEGIN PGM EII END PGM 9 4 Separate Program as Subprogram Operating sequence 1 The TNC executes the part program up to the block in which another program is called with CALL PGM 2 Then the other program is run from beginning to end 3 The TNC then resumes the first calling
236. int and saves the measured coordinate in a Q parameter The TNC also stores the coordinates of the touch probe position at the time of the triggering signal in the parameters Q115 to Q119 For the values in these parameters the TNC does not account for the stylus length and radius att Before programming note the following Pre position the touch probe in order to avoid a collision when the programmed pre positioning point is approached 430 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il da Parameter number for result Enter the number of the O parameter to which you want to assign the coordinate Probing axis Probing direction Enter the probing axis with the axis selection keys or ASCII keyboard and the algebraic sign for the probing direction Confirm your entry with the ENT key Position value Use the axis selection keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates of the nominal pre positioning point values for the touch probe To conclude the input press the ENT key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example NC blocks 13 7 Automatic Workpiece Measurement o il 13 7 Automatic Workpiece Measurement DATUM PLANE touch probe cycle 1 Touch probe cycle 1 measures any position on the workpiece in any direction 1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle 2 Then the touch probe approaches the workpiece at the assigned feed ra
237. int for machining The TNC takes the workpiece blank diameter and tool radius into account for calculating the starting point If you enter a workpiece blank diameter of 0 the TNC plunge cuts into the pocket center 3 If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and then to the center of the pocket end position starting position Y ad Y po S Y O ad Y YN sj d n OQ O gt Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane Q203 The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction lf you program DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed 8 3 Cycles for Milli If you want to clear and finish the pocket with the same tool use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low teed rate for plunging
238. ions sin OL COS q Ja b Ja Logical comparisons lt gt Calculating with parentheses tan aL arcus sin arcus cos arcus tan a e In log absolute value of a number the constant m negation truncation of digits before or after the decimal point Functions for calculating circles Pocket calculator Complete list of all current error messages Context sensitive help function for error messages Graphical support during programming of cycles Comment blocks in the NC program Actual positions can be transferred directly into the NC program Graphic simulation before a program run even while another program is being run Plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Magnification of details In the Programming and Editing mode the contour of the NC blocks is drawn on screen while they are being entered 2 D pencil trace graphics even while another program is running Graphic simulation of real time machining in plan view projection in 3 planes 3 D view Calculating the machining time in the Test Run mode of operation Display of the current machining time in the Program Run modes Mid program startup in any block in the program returning the tool to the calculated nominal position to continue machining Program interruption contour departure and reapproach Multiple datum tables for storing workpiece related datums 439 14 2 Technical Information 14 2 Technical Information
239. ith the following characteristics Flat rectangular surfaces Flat oblique angled surfaces Surfaces that are inclined in any way Twisted surfaces 230 MULTIPASS MILLING 230 For flat rectangular surfaces es 231 RULED SURFACE 231 For oblique inclined or twisted surfaces al e 232 FACE MILLING HA For level rectangular surfaces with indicated oversizes EE 4 and multiple infeeds MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 1 From the current position in the working plane the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool by its radius to the left and upward 2 The tool then moves at FMAX in the tool axis to the set up clearance From there It approaches the programmed starting position in the tool axis at the feed rate for plunging 3 The tool then moves at the programmed feed rate for milling to the end point 2 The TNC calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the program length and the tool radius 4 The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the stepover feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width and the number of cuts 5 The tool then returns in the negative direction of the first axis 6 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 7 Atthe end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the set up clearance GF Before programming note the following From the current positi
240. k with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example FN9 IF 10 EQU 10 GOTO LBL1 Programming If Then decisions Press the JUMP soft key to call the If Then conditions The TNC then displays the following soft keys FN9 IF EQUAL JUMP Example FN9 IF Q1 EQU Q3 GOTO LBL UPCAN25 GOTO If the two values or parameters are equal jump to the given label FN10 IF NOT EQUAL JUMP ON Example FN10 IF 10 NE Q5 GOTO LBL 10 GOTO If the two values or parameters are not equal jump to the given label FN11 IF GREATER THAN JUMP oe Example FN11 IF Q1 GT 10 GOTO LBL 5 GOTO If the first parameter or value is greater than the second value or parameter jump to the given label FN 12 IF LESS THAN JUMP FNZ Example FN12 IF Q5 LT 0 GOTO LBL ANYNAME GOTO If the first value or parameter is less than the second value or parameter jump to the given label 322 10 Programming O Parameters il Abbreviations used IF If EQU l Equals NE l Not equal GT Greater than LT Less than GOTO l Go to HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 6 A i Decisions with Q Parameters il 10 7 Checking and Changing O Parameters Procedure You can check O parameters when writing testing and running If you are in a program run interrupt it if required for example by pressing the machine STOP button and the INTERNAL STOP soft key
241. ket The tool approaches the machining plane smoothly in a vertically tangential arc if there is sufficient room If there is not enough room the TNC moves the tool to depth vertically The tool then clears the finishing allowance remaining from rough out 23 Que Feed rate for plunging 011 Traversing speed of the tool during penetration Feed rate for milling 012 Traversing speed for milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 5 SL Cycles X Example NC blocks o il Ye O gt O Y LO 00 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc Each subcontour is finish milled separately tZ CE 264 Before programming note the following The sum of allowance for side 014 and the radius of the finish mill must be smaller than the sum of allowance for side 03 Cycle 20 and the radius of the rough mill This calculation also holds if you run Cycle 24 without having roughed out with Cycle 22 in this case enter 0 for the radius of the rough mill The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for finishing The starting point depends on the available space in the pocket and the allowance programmed in Cycle 20 gt Direction of rotation Clockwise 1 O9 Machining direction 1 Counterclockwise 1 Clockwise gt Plunging depth 010 incremental value Dimension by which the tool plunges in each inteed gt Feed rate for p
242. kpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 371 il 10 13 Programming Examples 28 72 Call machining operation Reset allowance Angle increment in the X Y plane for finishing Call machining operation Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 10 Machining operation Calculate Z coordinate for pre positioning Copy starting angle in space Z X plane Compensate sphere radius for pre positioning Copy rotational position in the plane Account for allowance in the sphere radius Shift datum to center of sphere Account for starting angle of rotational position in the plane Pre position in the tool axis Set pole in the X Y plane for pre positioning Pre position in the plane Set pole in the Z X plane offset by the tool radius Move to working depth 10 Programming O Parameters il Move upward in an approximated arc Update solid angle Inquire whether an arc is finished If not finished return to LBL 2 Move to the end angle in space Retract in the tool axis Pre position for next arc Update rotational position in the plane Reset solid angle Activate new rotational position Unfinished If not finished return to label 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram a 10 13 Programming Examples il o N TOOL CALL i 2 51000 L keh 0 Be FHAX A L g 18 RO F9559 CC k
243. kpiece surface The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Use the machine parameter suppressDeptheErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Set up clearance 1 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Milling depth 2 Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Plunging depth 3 incremental value Infeed per cut The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth 8 Programming Cycles il gt Feed rate for plunging Traversing speed of the tool during penetration Circular radius Radius of the circular pocket Feed rate F Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Clockwise DR Climb milling with M3 DR Up cut milling with M3 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 60 Example NC blocks 8 3 Cycles for we ooness Studs and Slots o il CIRCULAR POCKET FINISHING Cycle 214 1 The TNC M automatically moves the tool in the tool axis to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance Y and subsequently to the center of the pocket 2 From the pocket center the tool moves in the working plane to the starting po
244. l BORE MILLING Cycle 208 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface and then moves the tool to the bore hole circumference on a rounded arc if enough space is available The tool mills in a helix from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate When the drilling depth is reached the TNC once again traverses a full circle to remove the material remaining after the initial plunge The TNC then positions the tool at the center of the hole again Finally the TNC returns to the set up clearance at FMAX If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling papers and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling n 196 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental value Distance between tool lower edge and workpiece surface gt Depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during helical drilling in mm min gt Infeed per helix 0334 incremental value Depth of the tool plunge with each helix 360 Note that if the infeed distance is too large the tool or the workpiece may be damaged To prevent the infeeds from being too large enter the maximum plunge angle of the tool in the ANGLE column of the to
245. l axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Feed rate for countersinking Q254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling 8 Programming Cycles il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 100 90 1020 80 90100 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Define cycle 8 2 Cycles for Drilling p and Thread Milling il Approach hole 1 spindle ON Call the cycle Approach hole 2 call cycle Approach hole 3 call cycle Approach hole 4 call cycle Retract in the tool axis end program d Thread Milling apping an 8 2 Cycles for Drilling 2 24 8 Programming Cycles il 8 3 Cycles for Milling Pockets 2 Studs and Slots Y Overview Gye SF Key Y O 4 POCKET MILLING rectangular Roughing cycle without automatic pre positioning L a 212 POCKET FINISHING rectangular 212 Finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning 2 2nd set up clearance 15 wt 213 STUD FINISHING rectangular 213 OQ Finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance i 5 CIRCULAR POCKET Roughing cycle without automatic pre positioning 214 C POCKET FINISHING K S Finishing cycle with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance O th 215 CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING 215 Fini
246. l status display are referenced to the manually set datum 8 7 coordi Transformation Cycles Example NC blocks 282 8 Programming Cycles il DATUM SHIFT with datum tables Cycle 7 gt The datum table used depends on the operating mode or is selectable Program Run operating modes zeroshift d table Test Run operating mode simzeroshift d table Datums from a datum table are referenced to the current datum The coordinate values from datum tables are only effective with absolute coordinate values New lines can only be inserted at the end of the table Function Datum tables are used for frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece frequent use of the same datum shift Within a program you can either program datum points directly in the cycle definition or call them from a datum table 7 Datum shift Enter the number of the datum from the i datum table or a Q parameter If you enter a Q parameter the TNC activates the datum number entered in the Q parameter Cancellation Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from the datum table Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc directly with a cycle definition HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles Example NC blocks j il Edit the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of operation Select the datum table in the Programming a
247. lder for more information on both the backup program and the floppy disk 60 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids 4 3 Working with the File Manager Directories If you save many programs in the TNC we recommend that you save your files in directories folders so that you can easily find your data You can divide a directory into further directories which are called subdirectories With the key or ENT you can show or hide the subdirectories Paths A path indicates the drive and all directories and subdirectories under which a file is saved The individual names are separated by a backslash Example On drive TNC the subdirectory AUFTR1 was created Then in the directory AUFTR1 the directory NCPROG was created and the part program PROG1 H was copied into it The part program now has the following path TNC AUFTR1 NCPROG PROG1 H The chart at right illustrates an example of a directory display with different paths HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th ear Manager SHE TNCA AUFTR1 KAR251 ing wi 4 3 Work 4 3 Working with the tin Manager Overview Functions of the file manager Copy and convert individual files cory aspira Display a specific file type aa Display the last 10 files that were selected m r m 4 m Erase a file or directory X Mark a file Rename a file Protect a file against editing and erasure T Cancel
248. lect the functions for section magnification Press the corresponding soft key to select the workpiece surface see table below To reduce or magnify the blank form press and hold the ZOOM IN or ZOOM OUT soft keys Shift the soft key row and select the TRANSFER DETAIL soft key Restart the test run or program run by pressing the START soft key RESET START returns the workpiece blank to its original state Coordinates for magnifying details The TNC displays the selected workpiece side for each axis and the coordinates of the remaining form during a detail magnification Select the left right workpiece surface a w Tl NA Select the front back workpiece surface Select the top bottom workpiece surface Shift the sectional plane to reduce or magnify the blank form Ed Select the isolated detail O DETAIL HEE GF After a new workpiece detail magnification is selected the control forgets previously simulated machining operations The TNC then displays machined areas as unmachined areas 380 11 Test Run and Program Run il Repeating graphic simulation n A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired either with the complete workpiece or with a detail of it _Function II St Key D Restore workpiece blank to the detail magnification in RESET O which it was last shown FORM q Reset detail magnification so that the machined noo workpiece or workpi
249. line Coordinates of the end points of the straight line Chamter CHF Chamfer between two straight Chamfer side length eS lines Circle Center CC Circle C Circular Arc CR Circular Arc CT O O None Circular arc around a circle center CC to an arc end point Circular arc with a certain radius Circular arc with tangential Coordinates of the circle center or pole Coordinates of the arc end point direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point arc radius direction of rotation Coordinates of the arc end point Je connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements Corner Rounding RND Circular arc with tangential Rounding radius R connection to the preceding and subsequent contour elements a J gt oO 6 4 Path contours a Coordinates Straight line or circular path with see Path Contours FK Free any connection to the preceding Contour Programming page contour element 143 FK Free Contour Programming A Straight Line L The TNC moves the tool in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block Coordinates of the end point of the straight line Further entries if necessary Radius compensation RL RR RO Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 6 4 Path Contours CaA an Coordinates Example NC blocks Actual position capture You
250. lling Pocket milling Page 226 Page 232 Circular pocket Page 282 Mirror image Page 286 Page 293 Page 288 Page 289 Scaling factor Page 294 Oriented spindle stop Page 295 Page 256 Tapping controlled spindle Contour data SL Page 260 Pilot drilling SL Il Page 261 Page 262 Floor finishing SL Page 263 Page 264 Page 290 Axis specific scaling Page 182 Page 184 202 203 Reaming Boring Page 186 Universal drilling 204 205 Back boring HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Page 188 Page 190 Page 192 Universal pecking il 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 220 221 230 231 232 262 263 264 265 267 450 Tapping with a floating tap holder new Rigid tapping new Bore milling Tapping with chip breaking Slot with reciprocating plunge Circular slot Rectangular pocket finishing Rectangular stud finishing Circular pocket finishing Circular stud finishing Point pattern on circle Hole patterns on lines Multipass milling Ruled surface Face milling Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling Page 197 Page 199 Page 195 Page 201 Page 238 Page 241 Page 228 Page 230 Page 234 Page 236 Page 248 Page 250 Page 268 Page 270 Page 273 Page 205 Page 207 Page 211 Page 215 Page 219 Table of Miscellaneous Functions M00 M01 M02 Stop program Spindl
251. lors White The contour element is fully defined Green The entered data describe a limited number of possible solutions select the correct one Red The entered data are not sufficient to determine the contour element enter further data If the entered data permit a limited number of possible solutions and the contour element is displayed in green select the correct contour element as follows Sian Press the SHOW SOLUTION soft key repeatedly until the correct contour element is displayed Use the zoom function 2nd soft key row if you cannot distinguish possible solutions in the standard setting If the displayed contour element matches the SOLUTION drawing select the contour element with SELECT SOLUTION If you do not yet wish to select a green contour element press the EDIT soft key to continue the FK dialog CES Select the green contour elements as soon as possible with the SELECT SOLUTION soft key This way you can reduce the ambiguity of subsequent elements The machine tool builder may use other colors for the FK graphics NC blocks from a program that you called with PGM CALL are displayed in another color Show block number in graphic window To show a block number in the graphic window Set the SHOW OMIT BLOCK NR soft key to SHOW 144 Program run full sequence Programming L Z 2 RO FMAX L 2 5 F200 L X 15 5 Y 0 FC DR R15 5 C FLT PDX 78 PDY Z 2 22 L Z 100 RO FMA 0 x 0 Y 0 31 END P
252. lso be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool length L There are two ways to determine the tool length L Determining the difference between the length of the tool and that of a zero tool LO For the algebraic sign L gt LO The tool is longer than the zero tool L lt LO The tool is shorter than the zero tool To determine the length Move the zero tool to the reference position in the tool axis e g workpiece surface with Z 0 Set the datum in the tool axis to 0 datum setting Insert the desired tool Move the tool to the same reference position as the zero tool The TNC displays the difference between the current tool and the zero tool Enter the value in the TOOL DEF block or in the tool table by pressing the actual position capture key Determining the length L with a tool presetter Enter the determined value directly in the TOOL DEF tool definition block or in the tool table without further calculations 98 E 4 AL 0 Pao bias AL gt 0 5 Programming Tools il Tool radius R You can enter the tool radius R directly Delta values for lengths and radii Delta values are offsets in the length and radius of a tool A positive delta value describes a tool oversize DL DR DR2 gt 0 If you are programming the machining data with an allowance enter the oversize value in the TOOL CALL block of the part program A negative delta value describes a tool undersize DL DR DR2 lt 0 An und
253. lunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool during penetration Feed rate for milling 012 Traversing speed for milling gt Finishing allowance for side Q14 incremental value Enter the allowed material for several finish milling operations If you enter 014 0 the remaining finishing allowance will be cleared 8 Programming Cycles il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 5 SL Cycles Define the workpiece blank Define tool drill Define the tool for roughing finishing Call tool drill Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters k il 8 5 SL Cycles N 66 Cycle definition Pilot drilling Cycle call Pilot drilling Tool change Call the tool for roughing finishing Cycle definition Rough out Cycle call Rough out Cycle definition Floor finishing Cycle call Floor finishing Cycle definition Side finishing Cycle call Side finishing Retract in the tool axis end program 8 Programming Cycles il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Contour subprogram 1 left pocket Contour subprogram 2 right pocket Contour subprogram 3 square left island Contour subprogram 4 triangular right island 8 5 SL Cycles o il O 8 6 for Multipass Mill 8 6 Cycles for Multipass Milling Overview The TNC offers four cycles for machining surfaces w
254. m min when retracting from the hole If you enter 0208 O the tool retracts at feed rate for plunging gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 0214 Determine the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool at the hole bottom after spindle orientation m x 3 D lt O z O O 8 2 Cycles for Drilling and Thread Milling 0 Do not retract tool Retract tool in the negative ref axis direction Retract tool in the neg secondary axis direction Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction Retract tool in the pos secondary axis direction m WN att Danger of collision Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away trom the edge of the hole Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Input mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis During retraction the TNC automatically takes an active rotation of the coordinate system into account gt Angle for spindle orientation Q336 absolute value Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before retracting it HEIDENHAIN TNC 320
255. mation Cycles Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 1 Define milling operation ate Transformation Cycles O O O 00 N 92 8 Programming Cycles il 8 8 Special Cycles DWELL TIME Cycle 9 This causes the execution of the next block within a running program to be delayed by the programmed dwell time A dwell time can be used for such purposes as chip breaking Effect The cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected Dwell time in seconds Enter the dwell time in seconds Input range O to 3600 s 1 hour in steps of 0 001 seconds HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example NC blocks 8 8 Special Cycles o il 8 8 Special Cycles PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 Routines that you have programmed such as special drilling cycles or geometrical modules can be written as main programs and then called like fixed cycles gt Before programming note the following The program you are calling must be stored on the hard disk of your TNC If the program you are defining to be a cycle is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you only need to enter the program name If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not located in the same directory as the program you are calling It trom you must enter the complete path for example TNCAKLARS5 FK
256. meters Working with string parameters You need string processing mainly to be able to read value from tables and configuration data You can assign a linear sequence of characters letters numbers special characters and spaces to a string parameter You can also check and process the assigned or imported values Assigning string parameters You have to assign a string variable before you use it Use the DECLARE STRING command to do so SPECIAL To select the TNC special functions press the FUNC EON SPECIAL FUNCTIONS soft key Select the DECLARE function DECLARE Select the STRING soft key STRING Example NC block HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 12 String Parameters j il 10 12 String Parameters String processing functions The STRING FORMULA or FORMULA functions contain various functions for processing the string parameters Use the STRING FORMULA function if you want to receive a string parameter e g QS10 as a result O Selecta Q parameter function Press the Q key in the numerical keypad at right The Q parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row Shift the soft key row Select STRING FORMULA function Enter the value for the string parameter in which the result is stored STRING FORMULA Press the enter key Select the soft key for desired function Press the enter key Select the soft key for desired function gt The string parameter for a result must also be assigned bef
257. ming and Editing mode press the TABLE EDITOR soft key to edit it To open the tool table TOOL T Select any machine operating mode To select the tool table press the TOOL TABLE soft TABLE key EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON oFF ON To open any other tool table Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Call the file manager MGT To select the file type press the SELECT TYPE soft key To show type T files press the SHOW T soft key Select a file or enter a new file name Conclude your entry with the ENT key or the SELECT soft key When you have opened the tool table you can edit the tool data by moving the cursor to the desired position in the table with the arrow keys or the soft keys You can overwrite the stored values or enter new values at any position The available editing functions are illustrated in the table below If the TNC cannot show all positions in the tool table in one screen page the highlight bar at the top of the table will display the symbol gt gt or lt lt Select beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table a ul v D Qo m Select previous page in table Select next page in table PAGE 4 Find the text or number FIND 102 Tool table editing Tool radius Emml Programming File u itablextool t 0 123 0000 15 9999 1111 98999 9999 23 20 9999 1111 9999 9999 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
258. mple The local O parameter Q25 is exported Example The local O parameters Q25 to 030 are exported gt The TNC exports the value that the parameter has at the time of the EXPORT command The parameter is exported only to the presently calling program 10 Programming O Parameters il 10 9 Accessing Tables with SOL Commands Introduction Accessing of tables is programmed on the TNC with SOL commands in transactions A transaction consists of multiple SOL commands that guarantee an orderly execution of the table entries y Tables are configured by the machine manufacturer TT Names and designations required as parameters for SQL commands are also specified The following terms are used Table A table consists of x columns and y rows It is saved as a file in the File Manager of the TNC and is addressed with the path and file name table name Synonyms can also be used for addressing as an alternative to the path and file name Columns The number and names of the columns are specified when configuring the table In some SOL commands the column name is used for addressing Rows The number of rows is variable You can insert new rows There are no row numbers or other designators However you can select rows based on the contents of a column Rows can only be deleted in the table editor not by an NC program Cell The part of a column in a row Table entry Content of a cell Result se
259. n and workpiece surface gt Thread depth Q201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread gt Pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 incremental value Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking Retraction rate for chip breaking 0256 The TNC multiplies the pitch Q239 by the programmed value and retracts the tool by the calculated value during chip breaking If you enter Q256 O the TNC retracts the tool completely from the hole to the set up clearance for chip release gt Angle for spindle orientation Q336 absolute value Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before machining the thread This allows you to regroove the thread if required Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will display the soft key MANUAL OPERATION If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active tool axis 202
260. n a circular arc The feed rate programmed in the APPR block is in effect The arc is connected tangentially both to the line Ps Py as well as to the first contour element Once these lines are known the radius then suffices to completely define the tool path Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR LCT soft key Coordinates of the first contour point Pa Radius compensation RR RL tor machining 122 Radius R of the circular arc Enter R as a positive value Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element 6 Programming Programming Contours il Example NC blocks Approach Ps without radius compensation Pa with radius comp RR radius R 10 End point of the first contour element Next contour element Departing on a straight line with tangential connection DEP LT ch and Departure The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point Pp to the end point Py The line lies on the extension of the last contour element Py is separated from Pe by the distance LEN gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pg and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LT soft key DEP LT LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element Pe to the end point Py Example NC block
261. n for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 230 Q203 Ss A Q217 AN SZ Q216 Q221 8 Programming Cycles il 213 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material enter a low value if you have already cleared the stud enter a higher feed rate gt Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 gt Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface ockets Studs and Slots gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur m x 3 D Z O z O O o gt Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane gt Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute value Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane gt Fir
262. n using the path functions RND and CHF the blocks before and after them must contain only coordinates in the working plane If you want to approach the contour on a tangential path you must use the function APPR LCT The block with APPR LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane If you want to depart the contour on a tangential path use the function DEP LCT The block with DEP LCT must contain only coordinates of the working plane 168 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 Standard behavior In the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Behavior with M118 M118 permits manual corrections by handwheel during program run Just program M118 and enter an axis specific value linear or rotary axis in millimeters Input If you enter M118 in a positioning block the TNC continues the dialog for this block by asking you the axis specific values Use the ENTER key to switch the axis letters Effect Cancel handwheel positioning by programming M118 once again without coordinate input M118 becomes effective at the start of block Example NC blocks If you want to be able to use the handwheel during program run to move the tool in the working plane X Y by 1 mm from the programmed value CS M118 also functions in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation If M118 is active the MANUAL OPER
263. nction Press the Q key in the numerical keypad at right The O parameter functions are displayed in a soft key row To select the mathematical functions press the BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Overview FNO ASSIGN a Example FNO Q5 60 X y Assigns a numerical value FN1 ADDITION Example FN1 Q1 Q2 5 ev Calculates and assigns the sum of two values FN2 SUBTRACTION E Example FN2 Q1 10 5 xy Calculates and assigns the difference of two values FN3 MULTIPLICATION Example FN3 Q2 3 3 Calculates and assigns the product of two values FN4 DIVISION a Example FN4 Q4 8 DIV 02 ay Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values Not permitted Division by O i x 7 2 1 lt FN5 SQUARE ROOT Example FN5 Q20 SQRT 4 SORT Calculates and assigns the square root of a number Not permitted Square root of a negative number To the right of the character you can enter the following Two numbers Two Q parameters A number and a O parameter The Q parameters and numerical values in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 3 Describing Contours a Mathematical Operations i il 10 3 Describing Contours A Mathematical Operations Programming fundamental operations Example To select the mathematical functions press the dico ds BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key To select the O p
264. nctions 320 10 5 Calculating Circles 321 Function 321 10 6 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters 322 Function ses 322 Unconditional jumps 322 Programming lf Then decisions 322 Abbreviations used 323 10 7 Checking and Changing Q Parameters 324 Procedure 324 10 8 Additional Functions 325 Overview 325 FN14 ERROR Displaying error messages 326 FN16 F PRINT Formatted output of texts or O parameter values 328 FN 18 SYS DATUM READ Read system data 391 FN19 PLC Transferring values to the PLC 339 FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization 340 FN 25 PRESET Setting a new datum 342 FN29 PLC Transferring values to the PLC 343 FNS EXPORT sos 344 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 21 il 10 9 Accessing Tables with SOL Commands 345 Introduction 345 A Transaction 346 Programming SOL commands 348 Overview of the soft keys 348 SOL BIND 26 349 SUL SELECT cme 350 SOL FETC Hines 353 SOL UPDATE 354 SOL INSERT 354 SOL COMMIT 355 SOL ROLLBACK 955 10 10 Entering Formulas Directly 356 Entering formulas 356 Rules for formulas 358 Programming example 259 10 11 Preassigned Q Parameters 360 Values from the PLC Q100 to 0107 360 Active tool radius Q108 360 Tool axis Q109 360 Spindle status Q110 361 Coolant on off 0111 361 Overlap factor
265. nd Editing mode of operation To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key see MGT File Management Fundamentals page 59 Display the datum tables Press the soft keys SELECT TYPE and SHOW D Select the desired table or enter a new file name Edit the file The soft key row comprises the following functions for editing Select beginning of table BEGIN te Transformation Cycles Select end of table m Z k Som Go to previous page PAGE O Go to next page PAGE N y 00 a Insert line only possible at end of table INSERT Delete line DELETE LINE i Find FIND Go to beginning of line BEGIN LINE E Go to end of line END LINE gt Copy the present value cory COPY Insert the copied value PASTE Add the entered number of lines reference points to the end of the table N LINES 284 8 Programming Cycles il Configuring the datum table If you do not wish to define a datum table for an active axis press the DEL key Then the TNC clears the numerical value from the corresponding input field To leave a datum table Select a different type of file in file management and choose the desired file After you have changed a value in a datum table you must uy save the change with the ENT key Otherwise the change may not be included during program run Status displays The additional status display shows the values of the active datum shift see Coor
266. ndle speed only To program a tool call press the TOOL CALL key CALL Ignore the dialog question for Tool number with the NO ENT key Ignore the dialog question for Working spindle axis X Y Z with the NO ENT key Enter the new spindle speed for the dialog question Spindle speed S and confirm with END Changing during program run You can adjust the spindle speed during program run with the spindle speed override knob S HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 5 1 Entering ss Data m 5 2 Tool Data 5 2 Tool Data Requirements for tool compensation You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are dimensioned in the workpiece drawing To allow the TNC to calculate the tool center path i e the tool compensation you must also enter the length and radius of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with TOOL DEF or separately in a tool table In a tool table you can also enter additional data for the specific tool The TNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when executing the part program Tool numbers and tool names Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 9999 If you are working with tool tables you can use higher numbers and you can also enter a tool name for each tool Tool names can have up to 16 characters The tool number O is automatically defined as the zero tool with the length L 0 and the radius R 0 In tool tables tool TO should a
267. ne axes moving the 42 In increments 43 With the electronic handwheel 44 With the machine axis direction buttons 42 Machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 163 Measuring the machining time 382 Mid program startup 390 Milling an inside thread 205 Mirror image 286 446 M Miscellaneous Functions Miscellaneous functions Entering 160 For contouring behavior 165 For program run control 162 For rotary axes 172 For spindle and coolant 162 MOD function Exiting 396 Overview 397 Select 396 MOD functions Modes of Operation 31 N NC and PLC synchronization 340 NC error messages 90 Nesting 303 Network connection 73 O Oblong hole milling 238 Open contours M98 167 Operating panel 30 Operating time 403 Option number 398 Oriented spindle stop 295 P Parametric programming See Q parameter programming Part families 316 Path 61 Path contours Cartesian coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 131 Circular path around circle center CC 129 Circular path with defined radius 129 Overview 125 Straight line 125 Free contour programming FK See FK programming Polar coordinates Circular arc with tangential connection 138 Circular path around pole CO is 1397 Overview 136 Straight line 137 P Path functions Fundamentals 114 Circles and circular arcs 1
268. nformation see Copying a single file page 66 52 3 Positioning with Manual Data Input MDI il 4 1 Fundamentals Position encoders and reference marks EL ra d E The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register the positions of the machine table or tool Linear axes are usually equipped with linear encoders rotary tables and tilting axes with angle encoders When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal The TNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis 4 1 If there is a power interruption the calculated position will no longer lil lil lil Il lil correspond to the actual position of the machine slide To recover this association Incremental position encoders are provided with reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the TNC when they are crossed over From the signal the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine positions For linear encoders with distance coded reference marks the machine axes need to move by no more than 20 mm for angle encoders by no more than 20 With absolute encoders an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch on In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re established
269. ng from 0 This numbering is referred to as the index The index is used for read and write accesses enabling a row of the result set to be specifically addressed It can often be advantageous to sort the rows in the result set Do this by specifying the table column containing the sorting criteria Also select ascending or descending order SQL SELECT ORDER BY The selected rows that were transferred to the result set are addressed with the HANDLE All following SOL commands use the handle to refer to this set of selected columns and rows When concluding a transaction the handle is released SQL COMMIT or SQL ROLLBACK It is then no longer valid You can edit more than one result set at the same time The SOL server assigns a new handle for each Select command Binding Q parameters to columns The NC program does not have direct access to the table entries in the result set The data must be transferred in Q parameters In the other direction the data is first prepared in the Q parameters and then transferred to the result set Specify with SQL BIND which table columns are mapped to which O parameters The O parameters are bound assigned to the columns Columns that are not bound to O parameters are not included in the read write processes If anew table row is generated with SQL INSERT the columns not bound to O parameters are filled with default values HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 SQL
270. ng or reducing the size of contours with Sm scaling factors for each axis Effect of coordinate transformations Beginning of effect A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as it is defined it is not called It remains in effect until it is changed or canceled To cancel coordinate transformations Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 0 Execute the miscellaneous function M02 or M30 or an END PGM block depending on the clearMode machine parameter Select a new program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 7 voor Transformation Cycles o il DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 A DATUM SHIFT allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece Effect When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined all coordinate data is based on the new datum The TNC displays the datum shift in each axis In the additional status display Input of rotary axes is also permitted gt gt Datum shift Enter the coordinates of the new datum Absolute values are referenced to the manually set workpiece datum Incremental values are always referenced to the datum which was last valid this can be a datum which has already been shifted Cancellation A datum shift is canceled by entering the datum shift coordinates X 0 Y 0 and Z 0 Status displays The actual position values are referenced to the active shifted datum All of the position values shown in the additiona
271. ngth LTOL TT Wear tolerance for radius RTOL TT Rotational direction DIRECT O positive 1 negative TT Offset for radius R OFFS R 99999 9999 TT Offset for length L OFFS TT Breakage tolerance in length LBREAK TT Breakage tolerance in radius RBREAK PLC value Tool type TYPE O cutter 21 touch probe Approach behavior O standard behavior 1 effective radius safety clearance is zero O probe monitoring off 1 probe monitoring on Block scan active 1 yes 0 no Search phase Number of the last FN14 error Real execution active 1 execution 2 simulation 10 Programming O Parameters il FN19 PLC Transferring values to the PLC The function FN 19 PLC transfers up to two numerical values or O parameters to the PLC Increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example Transfer the numerical value 10 which means 1 um or 0 001 to the PLC HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 8 Additional Functions o il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add FN20 WAIT FOR NC and PLC synchronization s This function may only be used with the permission of your machine tool builder With function FN 20 WAIT FOR you can synchronize the NC and PLC with each other during a program run The NC stops machining until the condition that you have programmed in the FN 20 block is fulfilled With FN10 the TNC can check the following operands Marker M O to 4999 Input O to 31 128 to 152 64 to 126 first PL
272. ns il 10 4 Trigonometric Functions Programming trigonometric functions Press the ANGLE FUNCTION soft key to call the angle functions The TNC then displays the following soft keys Programming Compare Example Programming fundamental operations FN6 SINE Example FN6 Q20 SIN Q5 Calculates the sine of an angle in degrees and assigns it to a parameter FN7 COSINE Example FN7 Q21 COS Q5 coso Calculate the cosine of an angle in degrees and assign it to a parameter FN8 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES z Example FN8 Q10 5 LEN 4 X LEN Y Calculate and assign length from two values FN 13 ANGLE Example FN13 Q20 25 ANG 0Q1 Calculates the angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 and assigns it to a parameter 320 10 Programming O Parameters il 10 5 Calculating Circles Function The TNC can use the functions for calculating circles to calculate the circle center and the circle radius from three or four given points on the circle The calculation is more accurate if four points are used Application These functions can be used if you wish to determine the location and size of a hole or a pitch circle using the programmable probing function FN23 Determining the CIRCLE DATA from three rues points OF CIRCLE Example FN23 Q20 CDATA Q30 The coordinate pairs for three points of the circle must be stored in Param
273. nt in the machining plane is offset from the edge of the workpiece by the tool radius and the safety clearance to the side The tool then moves in the spindle axis at the positioning feed rate to the first plunging depth calculated by the control Strategy 0389 0 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the next machining depth is plunged to In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 6 UN for Multipass Milling C il Strategy 0389 1 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the fee
274. ntry is at the end 92 A Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Overview of the buttons and soft keys for viewing the log files Go to beginning of log file BEGIN t Go to end of log file END Current log file CURRENT FILE Previous log file PREVIOUS FILE Up down one line Return to main menu Informational texts After a faulty operation such as pressing a key without function or entering a value outside of the valid range the TNC displays a green text in the header informing you that the operation was not correct The TNC clears this informational text upon the next valid input Saving service files If necessary you can save the Current status of the TNC and make it available to a service technician for evaluation A group of service files is saved error and keystroke log files as well as other files that contain information about the current status of the machine and the machining If you repeat the Save service data function the previously saved group of service data files is overwritten Saving service files Open the error window Press the LOG FILE soft key LOG FILE SAVE To save service files press the SAVE SERVICE FILES FILES soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Messages 4 8 The Error 5 1 Entering FB Retated Data 5 1 Entering Tool Related Data Feed rate F The feed rate F is the speed in millimeters per minute or
275. number by a point and a number from 1 to 9 e g T 5 2 You must use tool tables if you wish to use indexed tools such as stepped drills with more than one length compensation value Page 102 your machine tool has an automatic tool changer you want to rough mill the contour with Cycle 22 see ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 on page 262 Tool table Standard tool data T Number by which the tool is called in the program e g 5 indexed 5 2 NAME Name by which the tool is called in the program L Value for tool length compensation L R Compensation value for the tool radius R R2 Tool radius R2 for toroid cutters only for 3 D radius compensation or graphical representation of a machining operation with spherical or toroid cutters DL Delta value for tool length L DR Delta value for tool radius R DR2 Delta value for tool radius R2 TL Set tool lock TL Tool Locked RT Number of a replacement tool if available RT for Replacement Tool see also TIME2 TIME1 Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information on TIME1 TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL If the current tool age exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see also CUR TIME CUR TIME Current age of the tool in minutes The TNC automatically counts the current tool lite CUR TIME A starting value can be entered for used tools
276. number of tools With respect to the path of the tool center With respect to the cutting edge Create one program with graphical support while another program is running Straight line Chamter Circular path Circle center Circle radius Tangentially connecting circle Corner rounding Via straight line tangential or perpendicular Via circular arc FK free contour programming in HEIDENHAIN conversational format with graphic support for workpiece drawings not dimensioned for NC Subprograms Program section repeat Program as subprogram 14 Tables and Overviews il Fixed cycles Coordinate transformation Q parameters Programming with variables Programming support Actual position capture Test Run graphics Display modes Interactive programming graphics Program Run graphics Display modes Machining time Returning to the contour Datum tables HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Drilling cycles for drilling pecking reaming boring tapping with a floating tap holder rigid tapping Cycles for milling internal and external threads Milling and finishing rectangular and circular pockets Cycles for multipass milling of flat and twisted surfaces Cycles for milling linear and circular slots Linear and circular point patterns Contour parallel contour pocket OEM cycles special cycles developed by the machine tool builder can also be integrated Datum shift rotation mirroring scaling axis specific Mathematic funct
277. o remain in the result set Either enter the row number directly or program the Q parameter containing the index HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example Example 35 Ol Tables with SQL Commands sino 10 9 Acce Bh ic Entering Formulas Directly 10 10 Entering Formulas Directly Entering formulas You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations directly into the part program by soft key Press the FORMULA soft key to call the formula functions The TNC displays the following soft keys in several soft key rows Addition Example Q10 Q1 05 Subtraction Example Q25 Q7 Q108 Multiplication Example Q12 5 Q5 Division Example Q25 Q1 02 Opening parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 Q2 03 Closing parenthesis Example Q12 Q1 02 03 Square of a value Example Q15 SQ 5 sQ Square root Example Q22 SQRT 25 SQRT Sine of an angle Example Q44 SIN 45 Cosine of an angle Example 045 COS 45 Tangent of an angle Example Q46 TAN 45 Arc sine Inverse of the sine Determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse Example Q10 ASIN 0 75 Arc cosine Inverse of the cosine Determine the angle from the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse Example Q11 ACOS Q40 ASIN 356 10 Programming O Parameters il Arc tangent Inverse
278. ock that is stored in the buffer memory eee BLOCK O A E Copy marked block ae BLOCK The TNC search function Program run Programming full sequence With the search function of the TNC you can search for any text within EX11 H a program and replace it by a new text if required Se ee 4 4 Creating and Writing Programs BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 135 4 2 5 BLK FORM 2 X 30 Y 40 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z 53000 F2222 L X 3 Y 0 FMAX L Z 2 RO FMAX M13 L 2 5 F200 L X 15 5 Y 0 RL FC DR R15 5 CCX CCY Searching for texts OOVOUBWNP If required select the block containing the word you wish to find 2 ELT POX 78 POY 0 OS ace te EGr DB he cox o CURRENT WORD Select the search function The TNC superimposes 1a ror Rs Rit a ag the search window and displays the available search 18 POT DR Ras cox Replace with ___RepLace functions in the soft key row see table of search Le ELT ode see a functions 20 L x 30 Y 0 RO Search forward X 40 Enter the text to be searched for Please note that the search is case sensitive 31 END PGM EX11 MM ens Start the search process The TNC displays the available search options in the soft key row see the Choro FIND REPLACE REPLACE ALL enn cancel table of search options on the next page Start the search process The TNC moves to the next block containing the text you are searching for EXECUTE Repeat the search process The
279. of the tool axis if in the LIFTOFF column of the tool table you set the parameter Y for the active tool see Tool table Standard tool data on page 100 Remember that especially on curved surfaces the uy surface can be damaged during return to the contour Back the tool off before returning to the contour In the CfgLift0ff machine parameter define the value by which the tool is to be retracted In the CfgLiftOff machine parameter you can also switch off the function Effect M148 remains in effect until deactivated with M149 M148 becomes effective at the start of block M149 at the end of block HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 hom 0 gt os 00 O po gt sj Q 74 Miscellaneous Functions K il for Rotary Axes IONS 7 5 Miscellaneous Funct 75 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 Standard behavior The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in degrees per minute The contouring feed rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 The machine manufacturer must enter the machine geometry Your machine manual provides more detailed information M116 works only on rotary tables M116 cannot be used with swivel heads If your machine is equipped wit
280. oft key or rapid traverse FMAX soft key If you want to delete a block that is part of a cycle the TNC asks you whether you want to delete the whole cycle 8 Programming Cycles Calling cycles gt Prerequisites The following data must always be programmed before a cycle call BLK FORM for graphic display needed only for test graphics Tool call Direction of spindle rotation M functions M3 M4 Cycle definition CYCL DEF For some cycles additional prerequisites must be observed They are detailed in the descriptions for each cycle The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program These cycles cannot and must not be called Cycle 220 for point patterns on circles and Cycle 221 for point patterns on lines SL Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY SL Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA Coordinate Transformation Cycles Cycle 9 DWELL TIME You can call all other cycles with the functions described as follows Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL The CYCL CALL function calls the fixed cycle that was last defined The Starting point of the cycle is the position that was programmed last before the CYCL CALL block To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key CALL Press the CYCL CALL M soft key to enter a cycle call If necessary enter the miscellaneous function M for example M3 to switch the spindle on or end the dialog by pressing the END key Calling a cycle with M99 89 The M
281. oint for the next machining operation in the positive reference axis direction at the set up clearance or the 2nd set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations on the first line have been executed The tool is located above the last point on the first line 5 The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second line where It carries out the machining operation 6 From this position the tool approaches the starting point for the next machining operation in the negative reference axis direction 7 This process 6 is repeated until all machining operations in the second line have been executed 8 The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line 9 All subsequent lines are processed in a reciprocating movement 8 4 Cycles f Q200 Q204 e 250 8 Programming Cycles il Q203 gt Starting point 1st axis 0225 absolute value Coordinate of the starting point in the reference axis of the working plane gt Starting point 2nd axis 0226 absolute value Coordinate of the starting point in the minor axis of the working plane Spacing in 1st axis 0237 incremental value Spacing between each point on a line gt Spacing in 2nd axis 0238 incremental value Spacing between each line gt Number of columns 0242 Number of machining operations on a line gt Number of lines 0243 Number of passes Angle of rotation 0224 a
282. ol approaches the first plunging depth and distance at which the stepover occurs If the machining strategy 0389 0 or O389 2 is used gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur 8 Programming Cycles il lt lt 8 6 IM for Multipass Milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 100 100 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition MULTIPASS MILLING i il D PT x4 25 veo RO FAX M3 Preposition near the starting point B yeh CALE Calli the cycle PUE Peer the too axis ond program o 1 END PGM C230 WM YN 2 a Ga YN 280 8 Programming Cycles il 8 7 Coordinate Transformation Cycles Overview Once a contour has been programmed you can position it on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations The TNC provides the following coordinate transformation cycles 7 DATUM SHIFT OoOO m For shifting contours directly within the program or from datum tables 8 MIRROR IMAGE TAS Mirroring contours Soe 10 ROTATION 10 For rotating contours in the working plane gt 11 SCALING FACTOR 1 For increasing or reducing the size of contours p 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING FACTOR 25 cc For increasi
283. ol moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 4 Atthe set up clearance the direction of spindle rotation reverses once again HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling papers and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Standard value approx 4 times the thread pitch gt Total hole depth 0201 thread length incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread gt Feed rate FO206 Traversing speed of the tool during tapping gt Dwell time at bottom 0211 Enter a value between O and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur The feed rate is calculated as follows F S x p F Feed rate mm min S Spindle speed rpm p Thread pitch mm Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop button the TNC will display a soft key with which you can retract the tool 198 Q203 8 Programming Cycles il RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW Cycle 207 The TNC cuts the thread witho
284. ol table see Tool Data page 98 The TNC then automatically calculates the max infeed permitted and changes your entered value accordingly gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Nominal diameter Q335 absolute value Bore hole diameter If you have entered the nominal diameter to be the same as the tool diameter the TNC will bore directly to the entered depth without any helical interpolation gt Roughing diameter 0342 absolute value As soon as you enter a value greater than O in Q342 the TNC no longer checks the ratio between the nominal diameter and the tool diameter This allows you to rough mill holes whose diameter is more than twice as large as the tool diameter Q203 Example NC blocks 8 Programming Cycles il TAPPING NEW with floating tap holder Cycle 206 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the to
285. on below the key The TNC then displays the following soft keys Basic arithmetic assign add subtract Page 317 multiply divide square root ARITHN Trigonometric functions Fe Page 319 Function for calculating circles cIroLE Page 321 If then conditions jumps Ep Page 322 Other functions E Page 325 Entering formulas directly e Page 356 Formula for string parameters VEN Page 363 FORMULA HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 10 1 Principle and Overview il ers in Place of Numerical Values 10 2 Part Families O Param 10 2 Part Families O Parameters in Place of Numerical Values The Q parameter function FNO ASSIGN assigns numerical values to O parameters This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numerical values Example NC blocks You need write only one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimensions as O parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual Q parameters Example Cylinder with O parameters Cylinder radius R 01 Cylinder height H Q2 Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 Q2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 316 Q2 Q1 10 Programming Q Parameters il 10 3 Describing Contours through Mathematical Operations Function The O parameters listed below enable you to program basic mathematical functions in a part program Select a Q parameter fu
286. on the TNC positions the tool at the starting point first in the working plane and then in the spindle axis Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur 268 8 Programming Cycles il Starting point in 1st axis 0225 absolute value hz Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be Y multipass milled in the reference axis of the working m gt Q207 plane gt Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute value Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Q219 O N O gt Starting point in 3rd axis 0227 absolute value Height in the spindle axis at which multipass milling is carried out Q226 gt First side length 0218 incremental value Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 1st axis Q225 gt Second side length 0219 incremental value Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 2nd axis gt Number of cuts 0240 Number of passes to be made over the width gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving from set up Q227 clearance to the milling depth gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling gt Stepover
287. ona 10 8 Add j il ions Funct itiona 10 8 Add Immediately after TOOL DEF programmed values 61 Active tool compensation 200 Active transformations 210 334 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL 1 without oversize 2 with oversize 3 with oversize and oversize from TOOL CALL Oversize for tool length DL Oversize for tool radius DR Automatic TOOL CALL O yes 1 no Oversize for tool radius DR2 Tool index Active feed rate Tool number T Length Radius Index Tool data programmed in TOOL DEF 1 yes 0 no Active radius Active length Rounding radius R2 Basic rotation in MANUAL OPERATION mode Programmed rotation with Cycle 10 Active mirror axis 0 mirroring not active 10 Programming O Parameters il Active datum shift 220 Traverse range 230 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 B B B RY BY A 1 to 9 1 X axis mirrored 2 Y axis mirrored 4 Z axis mirrored 64 U axis mirrored 128 V axis mirrored 256 W axis mirrored Combinations sum of individual axes Active scaling factor in X axis Active scaling factor in Y axis Active scaling factor in Z axis Active scaling factor in U axis Active scaling factor in V axis Active scaling factor in W axis 3 D ROT A axis 3 D ROT B axis 3 D ROT C axis Tilted working plane
288. ontour is enlarged or reduced with reference to the center and not necessarily as in Cycle 11 SCALING FACTOR with reference to the active datum Effect The SCALING FACTOR becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program Itis also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of te Transformation Cycles 5 operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status _ display 5 29 co Axis and scaling factor Enter the coordinate axis O 2 axes as well as the factor s involved in enlarging or reducing Enter a positive value up to 99 999 999 pa oO Center coordinates Enter the center of the axis specific enlargement or reduction The coordinate axes are selected with soft keys Cancellation Program the SCALING FACTOR cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 for the same axis 290 8 Programming Cycles il Program sequence E Program the coordinate transformations in the main program For subprograms within a subprogram see Subprograms page 299 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 130 65 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Shift datum to center Call milling operation Set label for program section repeat Rotate by 45 incremental Call milling operation Return jump to LBL 10 repeat the milling operation six times Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift 291 8 7 voor Transfor
289. oo Return jump to LBL 1 section is repeated a total of 4 times Retract in the tool axis end program o il Program sequence Approach the groups of holes in the main program E Call the group of holes subprogram 1 Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 1 Y Programming Examples Ww 08 100 Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il E Programming Examples HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Move to starting point for group 1 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 2 Call the subprogram for the group Move to starting point for group 3 Call the subprogram for the group End of main program Beginning of subprogram 1 Group of holes Hole 1 Move to 2nd hole call cycle Move to 3rd hole call cycle Move to 4th hole call cycle End of subprogram 1 o il Program sequence Program the fixed cycles in the main program E Call the entire hole pattern subprogram 1 Approach the groups of holes in subprogram 1 call group of holes subprogram 2 Program the group of holes only once in subprogram 2 Y Programming Examples w 10 Define tool center drill Define tool drill Define tool reamer Call tool center drill Retract the tool Cycle definition CENTERIN
290. ool cutting edge feed rate decrease only Cancel M109 M110 Page 167 Feed rate for rotary tables in mm minn M117 M118 Cancel M116 Page 172 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Page 169 j il M120 Pre calculate radius compensated contour LOOK AHEAD Page 168 M126 Shortest path traverse of rotary axes Page 173 M127 Cancel M126 M140 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction Page 169 M141 Suppress touch probe monitoring Page 170 M143 Delete basic rotation Page 171 M148 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop Page 171 M149 Cancel M148 aun The machine tool builder may add some M functions that are not described in this User s Manual Also the machine tool builder can change the meaning and effect of the M functions described here Refer to your machine manual 452 Comparison Functions of the TNC 320 TNC 310 and TNC 530 Comparison User functions Program entry with HEIDENHAIN conversational programming Program entry according to ISO Program entry with smarT NC Position data Nominal positions for lines and arcs in Cartesian coordinates Position data Incremental or absolute dimensions Position data Display and input in mm or inches Position data Display of handwheel traverse when machining with handwheel superimposition Tool compensation In the working plane and tool length Tool compensation Radius compensated contour look ahead
291. ool number 013 Tool number of the roughing mill HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 5 SL Cycles Example NC blocks o il 8 5 SL Cycles ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance for side into account 2 Inthe first plunging depth the tool mills the contour from the inside outward at the milling feed rate Q12 3 The island contours here C D are cleared out with an approach toward the pocket contour here A B 4 Inthe next step the TNC moves the tool to the next plunging depth and repeats the roughing procedure until the program depth is reached 5 Finally the TNC retracts the tool to the clearance height f B bs 262 Before programming note the following This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling with Cycle 21 You define the plunging behavior of Cycle 22 with parameter Q19 and with the tool table in the ANGLE and LCUTS columns f Q19 0 is defined the TNC always plunges perpendicularly even if a plunge angle ANGLE is defined for the active tool f you define the ANGLE 90 the TNC plunges perpendicularly The reciprocation feed rate O19 is used as plunging feed rate f the reciprocation feed rate Q19 is defined in Cycle 22 and ANGLE is defined between 0 1 and 89 999 in the tool table the TNC plunges on a zigzag path at the defined ANGLE f the reciprocation feed is defined in Cycle
292. or log file is limited If the log file is full the TNC uses a second log file If this is also full the first log file is deleted and written to again and so on To view the error history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Open the error window Press the LOG FILE soft key LOG FILE a To open the error log file press the ERROR LOG FILE LOG FILE soft key ee If you need the previous log file press the PREVIOUS da FILE soft key ere If you need the current log file press the CURRENT as FILE soft key The oldest entry is at the beginning of the error log file and the most recent entry is at the end Keystroke log file The TNC stores keystrokes and important events e g system startup in the keystroke log file The capacity of the keystroke log file is limited If the log file is full a second log file is created If this second file becomes full the first is cleared and written to again and so on To view the keystroke history switch between CURRENT FILE and PREVIOUS FILE Press the LOG FILE soft key LOG FILE To open the keystroke log file press the KEYSTROKE KEYSTROKE aie E LOG FILE soft key E If you need the previous log file press the PREVIOUS iag FILE soft key poe If you need the current log file press the CURRENT Aine FILE soft key The TNC saves each key pressed during operation in the keystroke log file The oldest entry is at the beginning of the log file and the most recent e
293. orehand Use the DECLARE STRING function without entering a string Use the FORMULA function if you want to receive a numerical value e g Q10 as a result Concatenation of string parameters With the concatenation operator string parameter ll string parameter you can make a chain of two or more string parameters Example Concatenation of two or more string parameters 364 10 Programming O Parameters il Exporting machine parameters Because of the organization of the configuration data access to machine parameters Is possible only by designating the key tag and attribute by using string parameters Use the CFGREAD function Example Import a machine parameter Converting a numerical value to a string parameter The TOCHAR function converts a numerical value to a string parameter The value to be converted can be entered as a number or a Q parameter Also you can enter the number of decimal places of the string parameter output Example Convert parameter Q50 as string parameter QS11 Converting a string parameter to a numerical value The TOCHAR function converts a string parameter to a numerical value The value to be converted should be only numerical Example Convert string parameter QS11 to a numerical parameter 082 Reading a substring from a string parameter With the SUBSTR function you can import a certain range from a string parameter Example A four character substring LEN4 is read from th
294. ovement Machining operation 0 1 2 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Z coordinate at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur 8 3 Cycles for Mill Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the slot in the reference axis of the working plane Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute value Center of the slot in the minor axis of the working plane Pitch circle diameter 0244 Enter the diameter of the pitch circle Second side length 0219 Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling Starting angle 0245 absolute value Enter the polar angle of the starting point 242 8 Programming Cycles il gt Angular length 0248 incremental value Enter the angular length of the slot gt Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental value Infeed per cut O338 0 Finishing in one infeed gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Effective only during finishing if infeed for finishing is entered HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 m X D 3 El o O o z A 8 3 Cycles for H IS Studs and Slots
295. part program with the block behind the program call Programming notes No labels are needed to call any program as a subprogram The called program must not contain the miscellaneous functions M02 or M30 The called program must not contain a CALL PGM call into the calling program otherwise an Infinite loop will result HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 0 BEGIN PGM A y CALL y END P PGM B GM A Z 9 4 vera Program as Subprogram o il 9 4 so Program as Subprogram Calling any program as a subprogram To select the functions for program call press the CALL PGM CALL key on Press the PROGRAM soft key Enter the complete path name of the program you want to call and confirm your entry with the END key 302 9 Programming Subprograms and Program Section Repeats il 9 5 Nesting Types of nesting E Subprograms within a subprogram Program section repeats within a program section repeat Subprograms repeated Program section repeats within a subprogram Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subprograms Maximum nesting depth for subprograms approx 64 000 E Maximum nesting depth for main program calls The nesting depth is limited only by the available working memory You can nest program section repeats as often as desired Subprogram within a subprogram
296. part the contour on a straight line with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 6 Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Define tool in the program Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a circular arc with tangential connection Point 2 first straight line for corner 2 Insert radius with R 10 mm feed rate 150 mm min Move to point 3 Starting point of the arc with CR Move to point 4 End point of the arc with CR radius 30 mm Move to point 5 Move to point 6 Move to point 7 End point of the arc radius with tangential connection to point 6 TNC automatically calculates the radius 133 6 4 Path contours a Coordinates T 17 DEP LCT X 20 Y 20 R5 F1000 Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection AS END PGM CIRCULAR MM Sem o Ye 6 4 Path Contours Carte 134 6 Programming Programming Contours il HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define the workpiece blank Define the too Tool call Define the circle center Retract the tool Pre position the too Move to working depth Approach the starting point of the circle on a circular arc with
297. pdate and Insert evaluate this binding assignment during data transfer between the result set and the NC program An SQL BIND command without a table or column name cancels the binding Binding remains effective at the longest until the end of the NC program or subprogram gt You can program any number of bindings Read and write processes only take into account the columns that were entered in the Select command SQL BIND must be programmed before Fetch Update or Insert commands are programmed You can program a Select command without a preceding Bind command f in the Select command you include columns for which no binding is programmed an error occurs during read write processes program interrupt Parameter no for result O parameter that is bound assigned to the table column SQL BIND Database Column name Enter the table name and column name separated by a period Table name Synonym or path and file name of this table The synonym is entered directly whereas the path and file name are entered in single quotation marks Column designation Designation of the table column as given in the configuration data HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Example Bind a Q parameter to a table column Tables with SQL Commands Example Cancel binding hi 10 9 Acce o il 10 9 accell Tables with SQL Commands SQL SELECT SQL SELECT selects table rows and transfers them to
298. pensation remains the same in blocks that are programmed with M91 or M92 The tool length however is not compensated Effect M91 and M92 are effective only in the blocks in which they are programmed M91 and M92 take effect at the start of block Workpiece datum If you want the coordinates to always be referenced to the machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the soft key DATUM SET in the Manual Operation mode The figure shows coordinate systems with the machine datum and workpiece datum M91 M92 in the Test Run mode In order to be able to graphically simulate M91 M92 movements you need to activate working space monitoring and display the workpiece blank referenced to the set datum see Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space page 383 164 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il 74 Miscellaneous Functions for Contouring Behavior Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the tool would damage the contour In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error message Tool radius too large Behavior with M97 The TNC calculates the intersection of the contour elements as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point Program M97 in the same block a
299. perimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 169 Retraction from the contour in the tool axis direction M140 169 Suppressing touch probe monitoring M141 170 Delete basic rotation M143 171 Automatically retract tool from the contour at an NC stop M148 171 7 5 Miscellaneous Functions for Rotary Axes 172 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 172 Shorter path traverse of rotary axes M126 173 Reducing display of a rotary axis to a value less than 360 M94 174 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 17 il 8 1 Working with Cycles 176 Machine specific cycles 176 Defining a cycle using soft keys 177 Defining a cycle using the GOTO function 177 Calling cycles 179 8 2 Cycles for Drilling Tapping and Thread Milling 180 Overview 180 DRILLING Cycle 200 182 REAMING Cycle 201 184 BORING Cycle 202 186 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 188 BACK BORING Cycle 204 190 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 192 BORE MILLING Cycle 208 195 TAPPING NEW with floating tap holder Cycle 206 197 RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW Cycle 207 199 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 201 Fundamentals of thread milling 203 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 205 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 207 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 211 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING
300. pindle to the 0 position with an e oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off center gt distance X 3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored hole at the feed rate gt for pre positioning until the tooth has reached the set up clearance on the underside of the workpiece 4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole switches on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed rate for Z boring to the depth of bore 5 Ifadwell time is entered the tool will pause at the top of the bore hole and will then be retracted from the hole again Another oriented spindle stop is carried out and the tool is once again displaced by the off center distance 6 The TNC moves the tool at the pre positioning feed rate to the set up clearance and then if entered to the 2nd set up clearance at fal FMAX HZ C Before programming note the following Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter depth determines the working direction Note A positive sign bores in the direction of the positive spindle axis 8 2 Cycles for Drilling The entered tool length is the total length to the underside of the boring bar and not just to the tooth When calculating the starting point for boring the TNC considers the tooth length of the boring bar and the thickness o
301. positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction The TNC 320 can control up to 4 axes optionally 5 The axes U V and W which are not presently supported by the TNC 320 are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respectively Rotary axes are designated as A BandC The illustration at lower right shows the assignment of secondary axes and rotary axes to the main axes HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 aL er a d E Polar coordinates If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates you also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates For parts containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates ra d E While the Cartesian coordinates X Y and Z are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a circle center CC or pole A position in a plane can be clearly defined by the Polar Radius the distance from the circle center CC to the position and the Polar Angle the size of the angle between the reference axis and the line that connects the circle center CC with the position 4 1 See figure at upper right Setting the pole and the angle reference axis The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes These coo
302. program j il 8 5 SL Cycles 8 5 SL Cycles Fundamentals SL Cycles enable you to form complex contours by combining up to 12 subcontours pockets or islands You define the individual subcontours in subprograms The TNC calculates the total contour trom the subcontours Subprogram numbers that you enter in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY gt The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle all contour subprograms Is limited The number of possible contour elements depends on the TNC s available working memory the type of contour inside or outside contour and the number of subcontours SL cycles conduct comprehensive and complex internal calculations as well as the resulting machining operations For safety reasons always run a graphical program test before machining This is a simple way of finding out whether the TNC calculated program will provide the desired results Characteristics of the subprograms Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are programmed within the subcontour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M E The TNC recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RR The TNC recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwis
303. r automatic workpiece inspection O Reference plane X 1 Polar datum X 2 Calibrate TS 3 Measuring X 9 Calibrate TS length X 30 Calibrate TT 31 Measure tool length 32 Measure tool radius 33 Measure tool length and radius 400 Basic rotation 401 Basic rotation from two holes 402 Basic rotation from two studs 403 Compensate a basic rotation via a rotary axis 404 Set basic rotation 405 Compensating workpiece misalignment by rotating the C axis 410 Datum from inside of rectangle 411 Datum from outside of rectangle 412 Datum from inside of circle 413 Datum from outside of circle 414 Datum in outside corner 415 Datum at inside corner 416 Datum circle center 417 Datum in touch probe axis 418 Datum at center of 4 holes 419 Datum in one axis 420 Measure angle 421 Measure hole 422 Measure circle outside HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 X XI XI XIXI XIXI XIXI XI X X XI X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X o il 423 424 425 426 427 430 431 462 Measure rectangle inside Measure rectangle outside Measure inside width Measure ridge outside Boring Measure bolt hole circle Measure plane X XI XI XI K KI X HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heldenhain Stra 3e 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E Mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 31 1000 E Ma
304. r element A transition between two contour elements is called tangential when there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two contours the transition is smooth The contour element to which the tangential arc connects must be programmed immediately before the CT block This requires at least two positioning blocks A gt Coordinates of the arc end point Further entries if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks s A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the coordinates in the CT block and in the contour element preceding it must be in the same plane as the arc HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 6 4 Path von a Coordinates j il tes ina Coord sian i Q Y hom gt ad ce o Q s me A Y lo Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation Define tool in the program Call tool in the spindle axis and with the spindle speed S Retract tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX Pre position the tool Move to working depth at feed rate F 1000 mm min Approach the contour at point 1 on a straight line with tangential connection Move to point 2 Point 3 first straight line for corner 3 Program chamfer with length 10 mm Point 4 2nd straight line for corner 3 1st straight line for corner 4 Program chamfer with length 20 mm Move to last contour point 1 second straight line for corner 4 De
305. rdinates also set the reference axis for the polar angle PA X Y X Y Z EN Z X Z 56 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Absolute and incremental workpiece positions Absolute workpiece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 X 10mm X 30mm X 50 Mmm Y 10 mm Y 20 mm Y 30 mm Incremental workpiece positions Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write a part program in incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions Incremental coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions To program a position in incremental coordinates enter the prefix I before the axis Example 2 Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10 mm Y 10 mm Hole 5 relative to 4 Hole 6 relative to 5 X 20 mm X 20 mm Y 10 mm Y 10 mm Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference axis Incremental polar coordinates always refer
306. rectory acc 2 Additional marking functions see Marking files page 68 If you have marked files in the left and right windows the TNC copies from the directory in which the highlight is located Overwriting files If you copy files into a directory in which other files are stored under the same name the TNC will reply with a protected file error message Use the TAG function to overwrite the file anyway To overwrite two or more files mark them in the existing files pop up window and press the OK soft key To leave the files as they are press the CANCEL soft key 72 A Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il The TNC in a network To connect the Ethernet card to your network see Ethernet Interface page 409 The TNC logs error messages during network operation see Ethernet Interface on page 409 If the TNC is connected to a network the TNC displays the connected drives in the directory window 1 see figure at right All the functions described above selecting a drive copying files etc also apply to network drives provided that you have been given the corresponding rights Connecting and disconnecting a network drive PGM MGT To select the program management Press the PGM MGT key If necessary press the WINDOW soft key to set up the screen as It is shown at the upper right To manage the network drives Press the NETWORK soft key second soft
307. rkpiece Misalignment S il ocio the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe 13 4 Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe Introduction The following functions are available for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece Datum setting in any axis with PROBING POS Defining a corner as datum with PROBING P Setting the datum at a circle center with PROBING CC bases the probed value on the active preset or on the datum most recently set in the Manual operating mode although the datum shift is included in the position display alt Note that during an active datum shift the TNC always To set the datum in any axis see figure at right Select the probe function by pressing the as PROBING POS soft key Move the touch probe to a starting position near the touch point Select the probe axis and direction in which you wish Z to set the datum such as Z in direction Z Selection is made via soft keys Y To probe the workpiece press the machine START button Datum Enter the nominal coordinate e g 0 and confirm your entry with the SET DATUM soft key To terminate the probe function press the END key 422 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il Corner as datum using points already probed for a basic rotation see figure at right PROBING NE Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING P soft key Select the probe direction by soft key To probe the workpiece press the ma
308. rn to conventional programming The TNC needs a fixed point from which it can calculate the contour elements Use the gray path function keys to program a position that contains both coordinates of the working plane immediately before programming the FK contour Do not enter any O parameters in this block If the first block of an FK contour is an FCT or FLT block you must program at least two NC blocks with the gray path function keys to fully define the direction of contour approach Do not program an FK contour immediately after an LBL label HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 6 6 Path Contours FK Free Contour Programming o il ur Programming Q d d hom LL Y LL Y de nur Q Q ro 0 o lo Create FK programs for TNC 4xx n For a TNC 4xx to be able to read in FK programs created on an TNC 320 the individual FK elements within a block must be in the same sequence as displayed in the soft key row Graphics during FK programming e If you wish to use graphic support during FK programming select the PROGRAM GRAPHICS screen layout see Programming and editing on page 31 Incomplete coordinate data often are not sufficient to fully define a workpiece contour In this case the TNC indicates the possible solutions in the FK graphic You can then select the contour that matches the drawing The FK graphic displays the elements of the workpiece contour in different co
309. roceed as follows for manual calibration In the Manual Operation mode position the ball tip in the bore of the ring gauge PROBING To select the calibration function for the ball tip radius DAD and the touch probe center misalignment press the CAL R soft key Enter the radius of the ring gauge To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The touch probe contacts a position on the bore in each axis direction and calculates the effective ball tip radius If you want to terminate the calibration function at this point press the END soft key 13 2 Calibrating a Touch Trigger Probe 7 In order to be able to determine ball tip center misalignment the TNC needs to be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer The machine tool manual provides further information e If you want to determine the ball tip center 25 misalignment press the180 soft key The TNC rotates the touch probe by 180 To probe the workpiece press the machine START button four times The touch probe contacts a position on the bore in each axis direction and calculates the ball tip center misalignment 418 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il Displaying calibration values The TNC stores the effective length and radius as well as the center misalignment for use when the touch probe is needed again You can display the values on the screen with the soft keys PARA
310. rogram You always enter a part program in the Programming and Editing mode of operation An example of program initiation Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key MGT Select the directory in which you wish to store the new program D Enter the new program name and confirm your entry with the ENT key mm To select the unit of measure press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC changes to the program window Press the SPECIAL TNC FUNCTIONS soft key Press the BLK FORM soft key z Enter the spindle axis v Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN point 0 ENT 0 40 76 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Programming Workpiece blank def BEGIN PGM 14 MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 Z 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 10 0 Y 100 3 END PGM 14 MM maximum Z 4 4 Creating and Wri on Programs Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point m Z i Example Display the BLK form in the NC program Program begin name unit of measure Spindle axis MIN point coordinates MAX point coordinates Program end name unit of measure The TNC automatically generates the block numbers as well as the BEGIN and END blocks gt If you do not wish to define a blank form cancel the dialog atWorking spindle axis X Y Z by pressing the DEL key
311. rom Its current position E to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence A q Move to 2nd set up clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis O Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface A spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches on a straight line or circular arc the e starting point for the next machining operation The tool stops at F the set up clearance or the 2nd set up clearance O 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations have been executed rc Before programming note the following Cycle 220 is DEF active which means that Cycle 220 calls the last defined fixed cycle automatically If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 212 to 215 251 to 265 or 267 the set up 7 clearance workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance SS that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle Q203 8 4 Cycles f Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute value Center of the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working plane ii Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute value Center of the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane A Pitch circle diameter Q244 Diameter of the pitch a circle Starting angle Q245 absolute value Angle between the reference axis of the
312. rst contour element Next contour element 121 ch and Departure 6 3 Contour Approa ich and Departure 6 3 Contour Appro Approaching on a circular path with tangential connection APPR CT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa following a circular arc that is tangential to the first contour element The arc from Py to Pa is determined through the radius R and the center angle CCA The direction of rotation of the circular arc is automatically derived from the tool path for the first contour element Use any path function to approach the starting point Ps Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and APPR CT soft key APPR CT Coordinates of the first contour point Pa Radius R of the circular arc If the tool should approach the workpiece in the direction defined by the radius compensation Enter R as a positive value If the tool should approach the workpiece opposite to the radius compensation Enter R as a negative value Center angle CCA of the arc CCA can be entered only as a positive value Maximum input value 360 Radius compensation RR RL for machining Example NC blocks Approaching on a circular arc with tangential connection from a straight line to the contour APPR LCT The tool moves on a straight line from the starting point Ps to an auxiliary point Py It then moves to the first contour point Pa o
313. s Last contour element Pe with radius compensation 6 3 Contour Appro Depart contour by LEN 12 5 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program Departing on a straight line perpendicular to the last contour point DEP LN The tool moves on a straight line from the last contour point Pf to the end point Py The line departs on a perpendicular path from the last contour point Pe Py is separated from Pe by the distance LEN plus the tool radius Program the last contour element with the end point Pe and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP LN soft key DEP LN LEN Enter the distance from the last contour element to Py Always enter LEN as a positive value l Example NC blocks Last contour element Pe with radius compensation Depart perpendicular to contour by LEN 20 mm Retract in Z return to block 1 end program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 123 il ich and Departure 6 3 Contour Approa Departure on a circular path with tangential connection DEP CT The tool moves on a circular arc from the last contour point Pe to the end point Py The arc is tangentially connected to the last contour element gt Program the last contour element with the end point Pg and radius compensation Initiate the dialog with the APPR DEP key and DEP CT soft key DEP CT Center angle CCA of the arc Radius R of the circular arc If the tool should d
314. s Example NC blocks The program blocks 10 and 11 do not refer to the illustration Duration of effect The circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center IS programmed Entering the circle center CC incrementally If you enter the circle center with incremental coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool gt The only effect of CC is to define a position as circle center The tool does not move to this position The circle center is also the pole for polar coordinates 6 Programming Programming Contours il Circular path C around circle center CC Before programming a circular path C you must first enter the circle center CC The last programmed tool position before the C block is used as the circle starting point Move the tool to the circle starting point Coordinates of the circle center Coordinates of the arc end point Direction of rotation DR Further entries if necessary Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Example NC blocks Full circle For the end point enter the same point that you used for the starting point IE The starting and end points of the arc must lie on the circle Input tolerance up to 0 016 mm selected through the circleDeviation machine parameter Circular path CR with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with the radius R Coordinates of the arc end point Radius R
315. s the FAUTO soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 117 il Y c S pur O e LL me 0 bj 6 2 Fundament Enter a miscellaneous function here M3 and terminate the dialog with ENT 3 ENT The part program now contains the following line 6 Programming Programming Contours il 6 3 Contour Approach and Departure Overview Types of paths for contour approach and departure The functions for contour approach APPR and departure DEP are activated with the APPR DEP key You can then select the desired path function with the corresponding soft key Straight line with tangential connection APPR LT DEP LT Straight line perpendicular to a contour DEP LN point 4 Circular arc with tangential connection APPR CT DEP CT JN C Circular arc with tangential connection DEP LCT to the contour Approach and departure JO to an auxiliary point outside of the contour on a tangentially connecting line fi x Approaching and departing a helix The tool approaches and departs a helix on its extension by moving in a circular arc that connects tangentially to the contour You program helix approach and departure with the APPR CT and DEP CT functions Important positions for approach and departure Starting point Ps You program this position in the block before the APPR block Ps lies outside the contour and is approached without radius compensation RO Auxiliary point Py Some of the
316. s the outside corner CS Instead of M97 you should use the much more powerful function M120 LA see Behavior with M120 on page 168 Effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed GF A corner machined with M97 will not be completely finished You may wish to rework the contour with a smaller tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 hom 0 gt os 00 O po gt sj Q 74 Miscellaneous Functions j il Example NC blocks Large tool radius Move to contour point 13 Machine small contour step 13 to 14 Move to contour point 15 Machine small contour step 15 to 16 Move to contour point 17 ontouring Behavior YN oa O LL YN O D 7 O 2 N 66 7 Programming Miscellaneous Functions il Machining open contours M98 Standard behavior The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths at inside corners and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in incomplete machining Behavior with M98 With the miscellaneous function M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are completely machined Effect M98 is effective only in the blocks in which It is programmed M98 takes effect at the end of block Example NC blocks Move to the contour points 10 11 and 12 in succession Feed ra
317. scans the program blocks O A up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated If you have interrupted a part program with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program Startup 11 5 Program Run 390 11 Test Run and Program Run il To go to the first block of the current program to start a block scan enter GOTO 0 BLOCK To select mid program startup press the RESTORE POS AT N soft key Start up at N Enterthe block number N at which the block scan should end Program Enter the name of the program containing block N Repetitions If block N is located in a program section repeat enter the number of repetitions to be calculated in the block scan 11 5 Program Run To start the block scan press the machine START button Contour approach see following section Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns to the Program run full sequence workpiece contour in the following situations ANKER H Return to the contour after the machine axes were moved during a a e oe program Interruption that was not performed with the Z 138 000 tine INTERNAL STOP function Return to the contour after a block scan with RESTORE POS AT for EEE example after an interruption with INTERNAL STOP To select a return to contour press the RESTORE POSITION soft key eee Restore machine status if required 50 711 Y
318. sferring values to the PLC s 339 343 344 Q parameters R Radius compensation 110 Input 111 Outside corners inside corners 112 Rapid traverse 96 Reaming 184 Rectangular pocket Rectangular pockets Finishing 228 Roughing 226 Rectangular stud finishing 230 Reference system 55 Replacing texts 84 Retraction from the contour 169 Returning to the contour 391 Rotary axis Reducing display M94 174 Shorter path traverse M126 173 Rotation 288 Rough out See SL Cycles Rough out Ruled surface 270 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 S Scaling factor 289 Screen layout 29 Search function 83 Select the unit of measure 76 Setting the BAUD rate 404 405 Setting the baud rate 405 Setting the datum 58 Side finishing 264 SL Cycles Contour data 260 Contour geometry cycle 256 Floor finishing 263 Fundamentals 254 Overlapping contours 257 Pilot drilling 261 Rough out 262 Side finishing 264 Slot milling Reciprocating 238 Software number 398 Specifications 438 Sphere 371 Spindle speed changing the 46 Spindle speed entering 106 SOL commands 345 Status display 33 Additional 34 General 33 Straight line 125 137 String parameters 363 Subprogram 299 Superimposing handwheel positioning M118 169 Switch off 41 Switch on 40 T Table access 345 Tapping With a
319. shing cycle with automatic pre positioning a 2nd set up clearance O 210 SLOT RECIP PLNG a oO Roughing finishing cycle with automatic pre ca positioning with reciprocating plunge infeed M 211 CIRCULAR SLOT 211 00 Roughing finishing cycle with automatic pre i positioning with reciprocating plunge infeed HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 225 il t 8 3 Cycles for mini ockets Studs and Slots 226 POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 Cycles 1 2 3 4 5 17 18 are in a group of cycles called special cycles Here in the second soft key row select the OLD CYCLS soft key 1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth 2 The cutter begins milling in the positive axis direction of the longer side on square pockets always starting in the positive Y direction and then roughs out the pocket from the inside out 3 This process 1 to 2 is repeated until the depth is reached 4 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool to the starting position Before programming note the following This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center Pre position over the pocket center with radius compensation RO Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis set up clearance above the workpiece surface The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program D
320. sian coordinates for the pole or If you want to use the last programmed position do not enter any coordinates Before programming polar coordinates define the pole CC You can only define the pole CC in Cartesian coordinates The pole CC remains in effect until you define a new pole CC Example NC blocks 136 6 Programming Programming Contours il Straight line LP The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the straight line end point The starting point is the end point of the preceding block E P Polar coordinates radius PR Enter the distance from the pole CC to the straight line end point gt Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the straight line end point between 360 and 360 olar Coordinates The sign of PA depends on the angle reference axis Angle from angle reference axis to PR is counterclockwise PA gt 0 E Angle from angle reference axis to PR is clockwise PA lt O Example NC blocks 45 Circular path CP around pole CC d ad c O os re A LO do The polar coordinate radius PR is also the radius of the arc lt is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole CC The last programmed tool position before the CP block is the starting point of the arc P gt Polar coordinates angle PA Angular position of the arc end point between 5400 and 5400 gt Direction of rotation DR Example
321. soft keys Same O axis but from the opposite direction To probe the workpiece press the machine START button The value displayed as datum is the distance between the two points on the coordinate axis Measuring angles You can use the 3 D touch probe to measure angles in the working plane You can measure the angle between the angle reference axis and a workpiece side or the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90 426 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il To find the angle between the angle reference axis and a side of the workpiece Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Rotation angle If you will need the current basic rotation later write down the value that appears under Rotation angle Make a basic rotation with the side of the workpiece see Compensating Workpiece Misalignment on page 420 Press the PROBING ROT soft key to display the angle between the angle reference axis and the side of the workpiece as the rotation angle th a 3 D Touch Probe Cancel the basic rotation or restore the previous basic rotation This is done by setting the rotation angle to the value that you wrote down previously leces WI To measure the angle between two workpiece sides Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING ROT soft key Rotation angle If you will need the current
322. st side length 0218 incremental value Length of stud parallel to the reference axis of the working plane gt Second side length 0219 incremental value Length of stud parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane 8 3 Cycles for Milli gt Corner radius Q220 Radius of the stud corner gt Allowance in 1st axis 0221 incremental value Allowance for pre positioning in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the length of the stud HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 231 il K 8 3 Cycles for Minit ockets Studs and Slots 232 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 5 Cycles 1 2 3 4 5 17 18 are in a group of cycles called special cycles Here in the second soft key row select the OLD CYCLS soft key 1 The tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth 2 The tool subsequently follows a spiral path at the feed rate F see figure at right For calculating the stepover factor k see POCKET MILLING Cycle 4 page 226 3 This process is repeated until the depth is reached 4 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool to the starting position Before programming note the following This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center Pre position over the pocket center with radius compensation RO Program a positioning block for the starting point in the tool axis Set up clearance above the wor
323. t During a transaction the selected columns and rows are managed in the result set You can view the result set as a sort of intermediate memory which temporarily assumes the set of selected columns and rows Synonym This term defines a name used for a table instead of its path and file name Synonyms are specified by the machine manufacturer in the configuration data HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Tables with SOL Commands isina 10 9 Acce f il 10 9 mn 1 Tables with SOL Commands A Transaction In principle a transaction consists of the following actions Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set Read rows from the result set change rows or insert new rows Conclude transaction If changes insertions were made the rows from the result set are placed in the table file Other actions are also necessary so that table entries can be edited in an NC program and to ensure that other changes are not made to copies of the same table rows at the same time This results in the following transaction sequence 1 AQ parameter is specified for each column to be edited The Q parameter is assigned to a column tt is bound SQL BIND 2 Address table file select rows and transfer them to the result set In addition you define which columns are transferred to the result set SQL SELECT You can lock the selected rows Other processes can then read these rows but
324. t enter the pole again in a CC block after the FK contour Circle center in Cartesian coordinates 7 Ta Circle center in polar coordinates ae O 1 A Rotational direction of the arc DR OR a a Radius of the arc Example NC blocks 148 6 Programming Programming Contours il Closed contours You can identify the beginning and end of a closed contour with the CLSD soft key This reduces the number of possible solutions for the last contour element Enter CLSD as an addition to another contour data entry in the first and last blocks of an FK section as Beginning of contour CLSD End of contour CLSD ample NC blocks Ex HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 ur Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C o il O ur Programmin 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C Auxiliary points You can enter the coordinates of auxiliary points that are located on the contour or in its proximity for both free programmed straight lines and free programmed circular arcs Auxiliary points on a contour The auxiliary points are located on a straight line or on the extension of a straight line or on a circular arc P1 or P2 of a straight line X coordinate of an auxiliary point dle Y coordinate of an auxiliary point Pay P2y P1 or P2 of a straight line X coordinate of an auxiliary Pax Pax Pax point O tl Y P1 P2 or P3 of a circular arc Y coordinate of an auxiliary Pay pzy Pay
325. t pole in the Z X plane Move to starting position on cylinder plunge cutting obliquely into the material Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Finished If finished jump to end Move in an approximated arc for the next longitudinal cut Longitudinal cut in Y direction Update the counter Update solid angle Unfinished If not finished return to LBL 1 Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift End of subprogram 10 Programming O Parameters il Program sequence This program requires an end mill The contour of the sphere is approximated by many short lines in the Z X plane defined in 014 The smaller you define the angle increment the smoother the curve becomes You can determine the number of contour cuts through the angle increment in the plane defined in 018 The tool moves upward in three dimensional cuts The tool radius is compensated automatically 10 13 Programming Examples Center in X axis Center in Y axis Starting angle in space Z X plane End angle in space Z X plane Angle increment in space Radius of the sphere Starting angle of rotational position in the X Y plane End angle of rotational position in the X Y plane Angle increment in the X Y plane for roughing Allowance in sphere radius for roughing Set up clearance for pre positioning in the tool axis Feed rate for milling Define the wor
326. t the hole bottom Call DRILLING cycle Retract the tool End of program IONS gt ining 3 1 Programming and Executing Simple Mach 2 Protecting and erasing programs in MDI Q The MDI file is generally intended for short programs that are only needed temporarily Nevertheless you can store a program if necessary by proceeding as described below Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation O To call the file manager press the PGM MGT key Mar program management Move the highlight to the MDI file CN To select the file copying function press the COPY acl eve soft key Dd BOREHOLE Enter the name under which you want to save the current contents of the MDI file Copy the file To close the file manager press the END soft key Erasing the contents of the MDI file is done in a similar way Instead of copying the contents however you erase them with the DELETE soft key The next time you select the operating mode Positioning with MDI the TNC will display an empty MDI file C If you wish to delete MDI then you must not have selected the Positioning with MDI mode not even in the background you must not have selected the MDI file in the Programming and Editing mode you must cancel the editing protection of the MDI file iz O o o E Y O 5 5 T D gt iT x O ES S O O A A E For further i
327. tarting point for machining The starting point lies to the right of the stud by a distance approx 3 5 times the tool radius If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution The tool then departs the contour on a tangential path and returns to the starting point in the working plane This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool in FMAX to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the stud end position starting position Before programming note the following The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis and working plane The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same tool use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed rate for plunging att Use the machine parameter suppressDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculatio
328. te During probing the TNC moves simultaneously in 2 axes depending on the probing angle The scanning direction is defined by the polar angle entered in the cycle 3 After the TNC has saved the position the probe returns to the starting point The TNC also stores the coordinates of the touch probe position at the time of the triggering signal in parameters Q115 to 0119 att Before programming note the following Pre position the touch probe in order to avoid a collision when the programmed pre positioning point is approached I Probing axis Enter the probing axis with the axis Example NC blocks selection keys or ASCII keyboard Confirm your entry with the ENT key Probing angle Angle measured from the probing axis at which the touch probe is to move Position value Use the axis selection keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates of the nominal pre positioning point values for the touch probe To conclude the input press the ENT key 432 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il MEASURING touch probe cycle 3 Touch probe cycle 3 measures any position on the workpiece in a selectable direction Unlike other measuring cycles Cycle 3 enables you to enter the measuring path and feed rate directly Also the touch probe retracts by a definable value after determining the measured value 1 The touch probe moves from the current position at the entered feed rate in th
329. te for circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior The TNC applies the programmed feed rate to the path of the tool center Behavior at circular arcs with M109 The TNC adjusts the feed rate for circular arcs at inside and outside contours so that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant Behavior at circular arcs with M110 The TNC keeps the feed rate constant for circular arcs at inside contours only At outside contours the feed rate is not adjusted CS M110 is also effective for the inside machining of circular arcs using contour cycles If you define M109 or M110 before calling a machining cycle the adjusted feed rate is also effective for circular arcs within machining cycles The initial state is restored after finishing or aborting a machining cycle Effect M109 and M110 become effective at the start of block To cancel M109 and M110 enter M111 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 7 4 Miscellaneous Functions aii Behavior o il ontouring Behavior Y 2 me O 5 LL Y 5 O amp Q N Calculating the radius compensated path in advance LOOK AHEAD M120 Standard behavior If the tool radius is larger than the contour step that is to be machined with radius compensation the TNC interrupts program run and generates an error message M97 see Machining small contour steps M97 on page 165 inhibits the error message but this results in dwell m
330. ter the code number NET123 ave E A g Press the CONFIGURE NETWORK soft key to enter the network setting versions c for a specific device see figure at center right En f i Hostname TNC32 _TEST ed It opens the dialog window for the network configuration DHCP o A a IP address Emm Subnet mask zss zss e e e Setting Meaning gt S ee D Router A E es Q HOSTNAME Name under which the control logs onto the DC SEE rar LL o N q IP ADDRESS Network address of the control In each of the four adjacent input fields you can enter 3 digits of the IP address To jump to the next field press the ENT key Your network administrator assigns the control s network address SUBNET MASK Serves to differentiate between the network ID and the host ID in the network Your network administrator assigns the control s subnet mask BROADCAST Broadcast address of the control It is required only if it differs from the standard setting The standard setting is formed from the network ID and the host ID for which all bits are set to 1 ROUTER Network address default router Required only if your network consists of several subnets connected by router Se The entered network configuration does not become effective until the control is rebooted After the network configuration is concluded with the OK button or soft key the control asks for confirmation and reboots HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 411 Configuring network access to oth
331. th of the stylus and the effective radius of the ball tip To calibrate the touch probe clamp a ring gauge of known height and known internal radius to the machine table Calibrating the effective length gt The effective length of the touch probe is always referenced to the tool datum The machine tool builder usually defines the spindle tip as the tool datum Set the datum in the spindle axis such that for the machine tool table Z 0 ca L To select the calibration function for the touch probe os length press the TOUCH PROBE and CAL L soft keys The TNC then displays a menu window with four input boxes Enter the tool axis with the axis key Datum Enter the height of the ring gauge The menu items Effective ball radius and Effective length do not require input Move the touch probe to a position just above the ring gauge To change the traverse direction if necessary press a soft key or an arrow key To probe the upper surface of the ring gauge press the machine START button HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 13 2 Calibrating a Touch Trigger Probe k il Calibrating the effective radius and compensating center misalignment After the touch probe is inserted it normally needs to be aligned exactly with the spindle axis The misalignment is measured with this calibration function and compensated electronically The TNC rotates the 3 D touch probe by 180 for calibrating the center misalignment P
332. the END key or END soft key 396 12 MOD Functions il Test Run CANCEL T v4 4 o E O mm min Our 100x M5 Display software numbers Show active tool table in the test run Show active datum table in the test run ox cmo arr on A In all other modes Overview of MOD functions Manual operation BLE Y Depending on the selected mode of operation you can make the O _ following changes X LA DAC O Programming and Editing Position display 1 ME El amm Position display 2 REF NOML x gt Display software numbers A LL Enter code number Control model TNC 320 E Q NC software C_TNC320_332 Machine specific user parameters if provided PLE sof tuare TestPgaHC APT_2 02 O q N q Display software numbers Select position display Unit of measurement mm inches Programming language for MDI Select the axes for actual position capture Display operating time HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 397 12 2 Software Numbers 12 2 Software Numbers Function The following software numbers are displayed on the TNC screen after the MOD functions have been selected Control model Designation of the control managed by HEIDENHAIN NC software Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN NC kernel Number of the NC software managed by HEIDENHAIN PLC software Number or name of the PLC software managed by your machine tool bullder 398 12 MOD Functions il 12 3 Entering Code Numbers Function The TNC r
333. the cover 4 The buffer battery is on the right edge of the PCB Exchange the battery The socket accepts a new battery only in the correct orientation 5 Exchange the battery The socket accepts a new battery only in the correct orientation HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 N j os Z gt ERE A P j 4 14 3 Exchanging the Buffer Battery i il SYMBOLE 3 D touch probes Calibrating Triggering 417 3 D view 379 A Accessories 37 Actual position capture 79 126 Adding comments 87 Approach to the contour 119 With polar coordinates 120 Automatic Program Start 392 Auxillary axes 55 Axis specific scaling 290 B Back boring 190 Basic rotation Measuring in the Manual Operation mode 420 Block scan After power failure 390 Blocks Deleting 81 Inserting editing 81 Bolt hole circle 248 Bore milling 195 Boring 186 Buffer battery exchanging 443 C Calculating with parentheses 356 Chamter 126 Circle calculations 321 Circle center 128 Circular path 129 131 137 138 Circular pocket Finishing 234 Roughing 232 Circular slot Reciprocating 241 Circular stud finishing 236 Code numbers 399 Compensating workpiece misalignment By measuring two points of a line 420 Conversational format 78 Coordinate transformation 281 Copying program sections 82 Corner rounding 127
334. the result set The SOL server places the data in the result set row by row The rows are numbered in ascending order starting from 0 This row number called the INDEX is used in the SQL commands Fetch and Update Enter the selection criteria in the SQL SELECT WHERE option This lets you restrict the number of rows to be transferred If you do not use this option all rows in the table are loaded Enter the sorting criteria in the SQL SELECT ORDER BY option Enter the column designation and the keyword for ascending descending order If you do not use this option the rows are placed in random order Lock out the selected rows for other applications with the SQL SELECT FOR UPDATE option Other applications can continue to read these rows but cannot change them We strongly recommend using this option if you are making changes to the table entries Empty result set If no rows match the selection criteria the SOL server returns a valid handle but no table entries 350 Example Select all table rows Example Selection of table rows with the WHERE option name 10 Programming O Parameters il SQL EXECUTE Parameter no for result O parameter for the handle The SOL server returns the handle for the group of columns and rows selected with the current select command In case of an error selection could not be carried out the SOL server returns the code 1 Code 0 identifies an invalid handle
335. the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole Infeed depth for chip breaking Q257 incremental value Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking There is no chip breaking If O is entered Retraction rate for chip breaking 0256 incremental value Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Depth at front 0358 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at the front of the tool Countersinking offset at front 0359 incremental value Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Q358 8 2 Cycles for Drilling pero and Thread Milling il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling 214 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min gt Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling m X D 3 2 o O zZ e ol A 8 Programming Cycles
336. the workpiece press the machine START button The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as datum Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point See Corner as datum using points already probed for a basic rotation see figure at right page 423 The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as datum HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 th a 3 D Touch Probe leces WI Workp O S il To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement Select the probing function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key Probe the first touch point again Set the datum to the value that you wrote down previously To terminate the dialog press the END key 2 To measure workpiece dimensions O Select the probing function by pressing the PROBING O e POS soft key Position the touch probe at a starting position near the S first touch point A Select the probing direction by soft key k To probe the workpiece press the machine START A button Mm If you will need the current datum later write down the value that appears in the datum display t Datum Enter 0 be 2 To terminate the dialog press the END key Y Select the probe function by pressing the PROBING POS soft key d O Position the touch probe ata starting position near the 0 5 second touch point B Ss Select the probe direction with the
337. tially connected to both the preceding and subsequent contour elements The rounding arc must be large enough to accommodate the tool RND gt Rounding radius Enter the radius Further entries if necessary Feed rate F only effective in RND block Example NC blocks CES In the preceding and subsequent contour elements both coordinates must lie in the plane of the rounding arc If you machine the contour without tool radius compensation you must program both coordinates in the working plane The corner point is cut off by the rounding arc and is not part of the contour A feed rate programmed in the RND block is effective only in that block After the RND block the previous feed rate becomes effective again You can also use an RND block for a tangential contour approach if you do not want to use an APPR function HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 6 4 Path mos a Coordinates K il mates Coord c 6 4 Path Contours Cz Circle center CC You can define a circle center CC for circles that are programmed with the C key circular path C This is done in the following ways E Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center or E Using the circle center defined in an earlier block or E Capturing the coordinates with the ACTUAL POSITION CAPTURE key cc Coordinates CC Enter the circle center coordinates a Or if you want to use the last programmed position do not enter any coordinate
338. tion The TNC displays an overview window with NETWORK information on the active network connections INFO Configures access to network drives Selectable only DEFINE after entry of the MOD code number NET123 CONECTA Opens the dialog window for editing the data of an EDIT existing network connection Selectable only after eo entry of the MOD code number NET123 Configures the network address of the control CONFIGURE Selectable only after entry of the MOD code number ican NET123 Deletes an existing network connection Selectable DELETE only after entry of the MOD code number NET123 ee 410 12 MOD Functions Configuring the network address of the control network If you use a host name you must enter the Fully Qualified Hostname here It you do not enter a name here the control uses the so called null authentication ee Seow Ste ee a DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol In the drop down menu set YES Then the control automatically draws its network address IP address subnet mask default router and any broadcast address from a DHCP server in the network The DHCP server identifies the control by its hostname Your company network must be specially prepared for this function Contact you network administrator d Connect the TNC port X26 with a network or a PC NS Programming In the file manager PGM MGT select the Network soft key Press the MOD key En
339. to the last programmed nominal position of the tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 57 2 er e 0 EL ra d E 4 1 Setting the datum A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum Before setting the datum you align the workpiece with the machine axes and move the tool in each axis to a known position relative to the workpiece You then set the TNC display to either zero or a predetermined position value This establishes the reference system for the workpiece which will be used for the TNC display and your part program If the production drawing is dimensioned in relative coordinates simply use the coordinate transformation cycles see Coordinate Transformation Cycles on page 281 If the production drawing is not dimensioned for NC set the datum at a position or corner on the workpiece which is suitable for deducing the dimensions of the remaining workpiece positions The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3 D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN See Setting the Datum with a 3 D Touch Probe in the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual Example The workpiece drawing at right shows holes 1 to 4 whose dimensions are shown with respect to an absolute datum with the coordinates X 0 Y 0 The holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a relative datum with the absolut
340. tool at FMAX to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and finally to the center of the pocket end position starting position Pockets Studs and Slots rc Before programming note the following S O The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool Z q axis and working plane The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH Q200 oO determines the working direction If you program Q203 Z gt DEPTH O the cycle will not be executed P O If you want to clear and finish the stud with the same tool mm use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 and enter a low feed Up E 1 00 rate for plunging FL VIELE att Danger of collision Use the machine parameter suppressDeptheErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 236 8 Programming Cycles il gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud gt Feed rate for plunging 0206 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to depth If you are plunge cutting into the material
341. trol data transfer from the TNC establish the connection with your PC in the following way Select lt Extras gt lt I NCserver gt TNCremoNT is now in server mode It can receive data from the TNC and send data to the TNC You can now call the file management functions on the TNC by pressing the key PGM MGT see Data transfer to or from an external data medium on page 70 and transfer the desired files End TNCremoNT Select the menu items lt File gt lt Exit gt e Refer also to the TNCremoNT context sensitive help texts where all of the functions are explained in more detail The help texts must be called with the F1 key 408 12 MOD Functions 12 9 Ethernet Interface Introduction The TNC is shipped with a standard Ethernet card to connect the control as a client in your network The TNC transmits data via the Ethernet card with the smb protocol server message block for Windows operating systems or the TCP IP protocol family Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol and with support from the NFS Network File System Connection possibilities You can connect the Ethernet card in your TNC to your network through the RJ45 connection X26 100BaselX or 10BaseT or directly to a PC The connection is metallically isolated from the control electronics For a 100BaselTX or 10Basel connection you need a Twisted Pair cable to connect the TNC to your network CS The maximum cable length between TNC
342. u do want to program a DEF active cycle between the definition and call of a CALL active cycle do it only if there is no common use of specific transfer parameters 176 8 Programming Cycles il Defining a cycle using soft keys evan The soft key row shows the available groups of ae cycles Sa Press the soft key for the desired group of cycles for THREAD example DRILLING for the drilling cycles gt Select the cycle for example THREAD MILLING The TNC initiates a dialog and asks for all input values At the same time a graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the right screen window The parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt is highlighted 0 In the right screen window the TNC shows a graphic of the input parameters The parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt is highlighted HELP Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has been entered Defining a cycle using the GOTO function CYCL The soft key row shows the available groups of A cycles gt The TNC opens a pop up window Q gt Enter the cycle number and confirm it with the ENT key The TNC then initiates the cycle dialog as described above Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 BEGIN PGM 14 MM BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 8 Z 20 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 TOOL CALL 5 Z 53000 L Z 100 R FMAX M3 L_X 20 Y 3
343. ubdirectories and files To confirm press the OK soft key To cancel deletion press the CANCEL soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Programming U Nnc_prog testN H E File name Bytes Status Date Time u 17 01 2006 14 15 22 dl 173 17 01 2006 14 15 22 ES NS 10 50 09 UN UN U N U N UN UN U N UN UN DELETE CANCEL th ear Manager 3 A i iis E M JS 4 3 Working with the Mil Manager Marking files Mark a single file Tas FILE Mark all files in the directory TAG Unmark a single file UNTAG FILE Unmark all files UNTAG FILES Some functions such as copying or erasing files can not only be used for individual files but also for several files at once To mark several tiles proceed as follows Move the highlight to the first file To display the marking functions press the TAG soft key Mark a file by pressing the TAG FILE soft key Move the highlight to the next file you wish to mark To mark more files press the MARK FILE soft key To copy the marked files with the back soft key leave the TAG function copy To copy the marked Tiles select the COPY soft key acy v2 pe To delete the marked files press the back soft key to a exit the marking function and then press the DELETE soft key 68 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Renaming a file Move the highlight to the
344. ue Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane gt Workpiece blank diameter 0222 Diameter of the premachined pocket for calculating the pre position Enter the workpiece blank diameter to be less than the diameter of the finished part gt Finished part diameter Q223 Diameter of the finished pocket Enter the diameter of the finished part to be greater than the workpiece blank diameter and greater than the tool diameter 8 3 Cycles for Milli HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 235 il CIRCULAR STUD FINISHING Cycle 215 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool in the tool axis to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance and Y subsequently to the center of the pocket 2 From the stud center the tool moves in the working plane to the starting point for machining The starting point lies to the right of the stud at a distance of approx twice the tool radius If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging 4 The tool then moves tangentially to the contour of the finished part and using climb milling machines one revolution 5 The tool then departs the contour on a tangential path and returns to the starting point in the working plane 6 This process 3 to 5 is repeated until the programmed depth is reached 7 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the
345. unction not available on aci 4 a Information on tools 1 T Tool number and name TOOL 1 4 Status Displays 2 Tool axis E 25 4830 3 Tool lengths and radii R ls R2 0 0000 4 Oversizes delta values from TOOL CALL PGM and the tool table TAB DR DRZ 2 0000 3 0000 2 0000 5 Tool life maximum tool life TIME 1 0 000 0 0000 0 0000 and maximum tool life for TOOL CALL TIME 2 CUR TIME TIME1 0 01 0 05 6 Display of the active tool and the next replacement tool 6 TOOL CALL HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 35 il 1 4 Status Dispi Coordinate transformations STATUS 1 COORD TRANSF al Es Ww N Program name Active datum shift Cycle 7 Mirrored axes Cycle 8 Active rotation angle Cycle 10 Active scaling factor s Cycles 11 26 See Coordinate Transformation Cycles on page 281 Active miscellaneous functions M STATUS OF 1 M FUNCT Status of Q parameters List of the active M functions with fixed meaning List of the active M functions that are adapted by your machine manufacturer List of Q parameters defined with the Q PARAM LIST soft key STATUS OF 1 Q PARAM Programs Datum Rotatn Y k Mirroring 3 5 A Scaling R M Functions Q parameter list 1 Introduction il 1 5 Accessories HEIDENHAIN 3 D Touch Probes and Electronic Handwheels 3 D touch probes With the various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe systems you can Automatically
346. unges into the material with a helical sideward reciprocating motion from one end of the slot to the other Pilot drilling is therefore unnecessary The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The cutter diameter must not be larger than the slot width and not smaller than a third of the slot width The cutter diameter must be smaller than half the slot length The TNC otherwise cannot execute this cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 3 Cycles for wae a Studs and Slots o il Use the machine parameter suppressDeptheErr to define uy whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Danger of collision Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis at safety clearance below the workpiece surface 211 Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance i between tool tip and workpiece surface Depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Y ad 2 Y Lo S Y O ad Y YN sj n OQ O Plunging depth 0202 incremental value Total extent by which the tool is fed in the tool axis during a reciprocating m
347. unging depths are used each time Allowance for floor 0369 incremental value Distance used for the last infeed Max path overlap factor 0370 Maximum stepover factor k The TNC calculates the actual stepover from the second side length 0219 and the tool radius so that a constant stepover Is used for machining If you have entered a radius R2 in the tool table e g tooth radius when using a face milling cutter the TNC reduces the stepover accordingly Feed rate for milling 0207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Feed rate for finishing 0385 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling the last infeed Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when approaching the Starting position and when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely to the material 0389 1 the TNC moves the tool at the feed rate for milling Q207 HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Q357 8 6 UN for Multipass Milling i il 8 6 M for Multipass Milling 2 278 gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip and the starting position in the tool axis If you are milling with machining strategy O389 2 the TNC moves the tool at the set up clearance over the current plunging depth to the starting point of the next pass gt Clearance to side 0357 incremental value Safety clearance to the side of the workpiece when the to
348. ur FK FK free contour programming le Straight line e Circle center pole for polar coordinates EN Circular arc with center Bro Circular arc with radius ay Circular arc with tangential connection P Chamter corner rounding Tool functions TOOL TOOL Enter and call tool length and radius DEF CALL Cycles subprograms and program section repeats CYCL CYCL Define and call cycles Enter and call labels for subprogramming and SET CALL program section repeats STOP Program stop in a program uel Define touch probe cycles PROBE Coordinate axes and numbers Entering and editing V Select coordinate axes or enter them into the program 9 Numbers gAs Decimal point Reverse algebraic sign E Polar coordinate input Incremental dimensions A 510 00 x Q parameter programming Q parameter status Assume actual position or values from calculator Skip dialog questions delete words m gt Z 40 ENT Contirm entry and resume dialog E Conclude block exit entry Clear numerical entry or clear TNC error message fam Abort dialog delete program section Navigation in dialogs No function at present Up down one dialog box or button HEIDENHAIN a A Tool 10 Y Z y 10 0000 Il 2 1 0100 2 TAB 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 PGM 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 O CUR TIME TIME1 TIMEZ 0 06 0 00 0 00 NOML 1 T 1025 TOOL CALL 10 F mm min Our 43 5 M5 RT 0 BA Sst si a 500
349. urs FK Free C Data relative to block N Direction and distance of the contour element Angle between a straight line and another element or between the entry tangent of the arc and another element Straight line parallel to another contour element Distance from a straight line to a parallel contour Example NC blocks Data relative to block N Circle center CC Cartesian coordinates of the circle NS ora center relative to block N Polar coordinates of the circle center sco scorn relative to block N T x amp 3 O D Z O eJ O O HN 0 52 6 Programming Programming Contours il ur Programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Move to working depth Approach the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection FK contour section Program all known data for each contour element Depart the contour on a circular arc with tangential connection Retract in the tool axis end program 153 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C ur Programming 6 6 Path Contours FK Free C 54 Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Tool call Retract the tool Pre position the tool Pre position the tool in the tool axis Move to working depth 6 Programming Programming Contours
350. ut a floating tap holder in one or more passes 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 4 The TNC stops the spindle turning at set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 8 2 Cycles for Drilling papers and Thread Milling o il 8 2 Cycles for Drilling no and Thread Milling 207 RT Set up clearance 0200 incremental value Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Total hole depth 0201 incremental value Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread gt Pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute value Coordinate of the workpiece surface gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental value Coordinate in the tool axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece clamping devices can occur Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will displ
351. ut down the system and restart the TNC The error message is displayed in the header until it is cleared or replaced by a higher priority error An error message that contains a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block Open the error window Press the ERR key The TNC opens the error window ES and displays all accumulated error messages Close the error window Press the END soft key or END E Press the ERR key The TNC closes the error window 90 4 Programming Fundamentals of NC File Management Programming Aids il Detailed error messages The TNC displays possible causes of the error and suggestions for solving the problem Open the error window Information on the error cause and corrective action a Position the highlight on the error message and press the INFO soft key The TNC opens the window with information on the error cause and corrective action To leave Info press the INFO soft key again DETAILS soft key The DETAILS soft key supplies information on the error message This information is only required if servicing is needed Open the error window Detailed information about the error message Position the highlight on the error message and press the DETAILS soft key The TNC opens the window with internal information about the error DETAILS To leave Details press the DETAILS soft key again Clearing errors Clearing errors outside o
352. versational format A part program consists of a series of program blocks The figure at right illustrates the elements of a block The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending sequence Blocks The first block of a program is identified by BEGIN PGM the program name and the active unit of measure The subsequent blocks contain information on The workpiece blank Tool definitions tool calls Path function Feed rates and spindle speeds as well as Block number Path contours cycles and other functions The last block of a program is identified by END PGM the program name and the active unit of measure Defining the blank form BLK Form After initiating a new program you define a cuboid workpiece blank To define the workpiece blank press the SPEC FCT soft key and then the BLK FORM soft key This definition is needed for the TNC s graphic simulation feature The sides of the workpiece blank lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes and can be up to 100 000 mm long The blank form is defined by two of Its corner points MIN point the smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values MAX point the largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values ce You only need to define the blank form if you wish to run a graphic test for the program HEIDENHAIN TNC 320 4 4 Creating and Wri oa Programs 4 4 Creating and Wri T Programs Creating a new part p
353. with cable 1 Infrared touch probe machine dependent function 180 rotation a E allowed i Oriented spindle stop 0 No oriented spindle stop 1 Spindle orientation the touch probe is oriented so that it is always probed by the same point on the touch probe stylus tip T 2 Zz S F mm min Our 100 M5 Spindle angle Enter the angle of the touch probe at its home position This value is used for spindle orientation during calibration of the ball tip radius and for internal calculations machine dependent function Probe length Length ascertained by calibration by which the TNC offsets the touch probe dimension Touch probe radius R Radius ascertained by calibration by which the TNC offsets the touch probe dimension Touch probe radius R2 Ball radius ascertained by calibration by which the TNC offsets the touch probe dimension Center offset 1 Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the reference axis Center offset 2 Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the minor axis Calibrate angle Here the TNC enters the orientation angle with which the touch probe was calibrated Rapid traverse for measuring Feed rate at which the touch probe pre positions or is positioned between the measuring points 428 13 Touch Probe Cycles in the Manual and Electronic Handwheel Modes il Feed for probing Feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the workpiece Set up clearance In t
354. ycle defined Slot width too small Pocket too small 0202 not defined 0205 not defined Enter 0218 greater than Q219 CYCL 210 not permitted CYCL 211 not permitted 0220 too large Enter 0222 greater than 0223 0244 must be greater than O 0245 must not equal Q246 Angle range must be lt 360 Enter 0223 greater than Q222 0214 O not permitted 10 Programming O Parameters il 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 Traverse direction not defined No datum table active Position error center in axis 1 Position error center in axis 2 Hole diameter too small Hole diameter too large Stud diameter too small Stud diameter too large Pocket too small rework axis 1 Pocket too small rework axis 2 Pocket too large scrap axis 1 Pocket too large scrap axis 2 Stud too small scrap axis 1 Stud too small scrap axis 2 Stud too large rework axis 1 Stud too large rework axis 2 TCHPROBE 425 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 425 length below min TCHPROBE 426 length exceeds max TCHPROBE 426 length below min TCHPROBE 430 diameter too large TCHPROBE 430 diameter too small No measuring axis defined Tool breakage tolerance exceeded Enter 0247 unequal 0 Enter Q247 greater than 5 Datum table Enter direction 0351 unequal

SW01 - heidenhain

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents